JP2011156128A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine showing suggestive presentation with high interest to a player. <P>SOLUTION: At every decision of continuous preview presentation, the number (the continuous preview frequency) of variable presentation for performing the continuous preview presentation is decided, and continuation determination information is stored in continuation determination information storage areas of the read ahead information first to fourth areas according to the decided number. Thus, even when execution of the continuous preview presentation is decided, the case where a "jellyfish" image related to the continuous preview presentation is not displayed often occurs from the variable presentation immediately after that decision. Accordingly, even when the "jellyfish" image related to the continuous preview presentation is not displayed from the variable presentation immediately after the starting prize and the "jellyfish" image is displayed in the subsequent variable presentation, the player can expect that the displayed image is not an image related to single preview presentation, but an image related to the continuous preview presentation, so that expectation for the single preview presentation is more increased to further enhance player's interest. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters the starting entrance (start winning prize). For example, the effective display area has three horizontally or vertically, or 3 × 3 cells. A total of nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling stops, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a thing that generates a jackpot when there is.

  In addition, during scrolling of symbols, etc., an entertainment effect that suggests in advance that a gaming state (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player with a higher probability than normal times may occur in advance (for example, an effect by reach display, etc.) In order to provide a player with a sense of expectation for an advantageous game, an attempt has been made.

  A suggestion effect that continuously suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state over a plurality of fluctuating effects is known as a type of this entertainment effect. By this suggestion effect, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation of a gaming state that is advantageous over a plurality of variable effects instead of a single variation effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, in the above-mentioned suggestion effect in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the expectation for the suggestion effect may be diluted because no consideration is given to how to make it appear.

  For example, immediately after the completion of one suggestion effect, another suggestion effect is executed continuously, so that the expectation for each suggestion effect is diminished, or the timing of the start prize and the execution of the suggestion effect starts. Depending on the relationship with the timing, the player can easily infer that the degree of expectation for the suggested suggestion that has been started is zero, and the interest in the suggestion may be lost.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a highly interesting suggestive effect to a player.

Means for Solving the Problems and Effects of the Invention

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition is a lottery based on the start information. Is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery means performs lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The production control signal generated by the generation means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Thereby, in the sub-control means, the change effect is performed on the display means by the control of the change control means based on the effect control signal output by the first output means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect. Here, since the variation effect is performed by an effect control signal based on the lottery result, a predetermined game value is given to the player in accordance with the lottery result performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined based on the start information used for the lottery. The information regarding the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. When the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, the main control The starting information stored in the storage means of the means, the number of starting information acquired before the starting information based on the determination that the suggesting effect is executed by the determining means is specified by the specifying means, the suggesting effect The determining means determines the number of fluctuating effects to be performed within a range equal to or less than the number of start information specified by the specifying means. And when it determines with performing the suggestion effect by the determination means, it is controlled by the suggestion control means so that the suggestion effect is performed over the number of fluctuation effects determined by the determination means. In other words, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed for all the changing effects corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that is the basis of the execution of the suggestion effect, but a part of the start effect This is performed for variable effects corresponding to information. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed over the fluctuating effects corresponding to all the start information stored in the storage means at that time, so a predetermined game value is given in which start information It is difficult for the player to know whether the possibility of being played is high. Therefore, since the player can continue the game while guessing it, there is an effect that a highly interesting suggestive effect can be provided to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means, the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect is 1 From the above and below the number of starting information specified by the specifying means, it is selected and determined each time by the determining means, so that the number of fluctuating effects where the suggested effects are performed can be changed each time. it can. Therefore, since it becomes more difficult for the player to know which start information is likely to be given the predetermined game value, the player can continue the game by guessing while enjoying it more. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a more interesting suggestion.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the second determination means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, and the second determination means. If the determination means determines that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is controlled by the control of the second suggestion control means with respect to the one change effect performed by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means. Is called. Here, the gaming machine according to claim 3 makes it difficult for the player to know which start information is likely to be given the predetermined game value when the suggestion effect is performed. When the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether it is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while inferring whether it is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a more interesting suggestion.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing suggestion instruction information for instructing to perform suggestion effects on the variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means. Is provided in the sub-control means, and when it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means, based on the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means, The suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage unit by the suggestion instruction information storage unit in association with the start information used for the lottery. And the suggestion control means is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effects executed based on the effect control signal triggered by the reception of the effect control signal output from the first output means, When the suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage unit, the suggestion effect is controlled to be performed with respect to the variation effect. With this, when the suggestion effect is configured to be performed for the variable effect corresponding to a part of the start information of the start information acquired before the start information on which the determination of the execution of the suggestion effect is based Even if it exists, there exists an effect that a suggestion effect can be easily performed with respect to the one part fluctuation effect, and the program concerning the control can be simplified.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the sub-control means is provided with lottery content storage means for storing the lottery contents output from the second output means, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the effect control is performed. The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis of signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage unit by the lottery content extraction unit. Then, it is determined by the corresponding determining means whether the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extracting means are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are If it is determined that it is not appropriate, the suggestion control means controls the suggestion effect so as not to be executed. If the production control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the production control signal or the lottery content may be destroyed. Therefore, if the suggested production is performed in such a case, the player will be misunderstood. Although there is a possibility, in this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress misunderstanding of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reserve ball storage area, a reserve ball execution area, a 1st prefetch execution area, and a 2nd prefetch execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (b) is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for jackpots typically, (c) is for out (normal) It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table typically, (d) is the figure which showed typically the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically the data contained in a prefetch command. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is the figure which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is. (A) is the flowchart which showed the frame button operation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is Blocks which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. (A)-(g) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous determination information set to a continuous determination information storage area, and a continuous avoidance flag. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 48, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed in accordance with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start-start prize), which will be described later, are performed according to the theme given to each stage. Designed. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with the entry to the first entry port 64 (start winning prize) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the end of the change. As for the ball (reserved ball) that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start prize is indicated by the lighting state. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, a determination is made whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery). Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. Also, the short-time state (short-time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 64. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 to be opened or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases by hit.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). A second symbol composed of a third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. A display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opened). Configured). The number of passing balls through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 25). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a first entrance 64 is provided. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 receives the ball at the first entrance 64 (start winning). Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the big hit is set by a big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the big hit set by the big hit random number table. If it matches the value of the random number (hit value) This jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probabilities (periods that are not probable) and one for high probabilities (probably during probabilities) that have a higher probability of jackpots than the low probabilities. The number of random numbers that is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between a low probability and a high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are big hits at low probability is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability big hit random number table. . On the other hand, the number of random number values (hit values) that is a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390 , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the hit values stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table and the hit values stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table are set so as not to overlap each other. It is set. Here, if there is a value that is a winning value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a jackpot increases. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those for the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table. As shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot type table is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 25).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table used at the time of a big hit and a deviation variation pattern table used at the time of a loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Also, as the variation pattern table for losing, the variation pattern table for losing (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change or a normal low-probability state excluding a short-time state. Also, a deviation (normal) variation pattern table is prepared.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common jackpots that are referenced when 15R probability variable jackpots and 15R regular jackpots are determined as jackpot types, and 2R probability variable jackpots that are referenced when 2R probability variable jackpots are determined. Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area, the hold area The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is determined from the variation pattern for jackpot.

  Common to 15R jackpots are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. The correspondence with the value of the variable type counter CS1 is 0-10 for various types of normal reach, 11-99 for various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. 100-198. The various types of Nordreach are reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the 1st pattern (or 3rd pattern) is aligned (so-called bita-stopped pattern is aligned). The first pattern (or the third pattern) after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach), etc. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after time reach (for example, a reach that further develops after super reach or a special reach that develops from normal reach different from super reach). The 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, so that various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for 2R probability variation jackpots, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99 for 2R fluctuation A, 100 to 149 for 2R fluctuation B, and 2 to 10 for 2R fluctuation C. 150-198. The 2R variation A is an effect in which, for example, the final first symbol (or third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol with “chicken”, and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) accompanied by “girl” is an effect that stops at a specific symbol. The 2R variation C is the final 1st symbol with the lighting of the one notification lamp described above. The design (or the 3rd design) is an effect that stops at a specific design.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table is used only for complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and other than front / rear reach and front / back deviation It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. Has been. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit value (hit value), that is, a value that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding the short time state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is Determined from outlier (normal) variation pattern.

  Dedicated to complete deviation includes short deviation in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and long deviation that is longer than the short deviation but in which reach is not established, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The correspondence is 0 to 148 for short out and 149 to 198 for long out. In addition, for reach, the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short and the normal reach is various, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, and the special that is longer than the super-reach. There are various types of reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for various types of outliers, 149 to 190 for various types of outliers, and 191 to 198 for various types of outliers.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. The reach is common to all types of out-of-bounds and out-of-bounds, and is used when reach other than back-and-forth out-reach and back-and-forth out is determined. The groups are divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, it is stored in the same holding area In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (probability change) change pattern.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 148 for various types of outliers, 149 to 190 for various types of outliers, and 191 to 198 for various types of outliers.

  The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. . Therefore, if there are many extraordinary deviations in the short-time state or high-probability state, it takes time until the next variable display starts, giving the player a wait state, and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table. However, even if the gaming state is normal, a plurality of reserved balls (for example, In the case of 4 or more, 3 or more), the variation display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the above.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern table for each outlier shown in FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D, when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 25), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a first prefetch execution area 203d, a second prefetch execution area 203e, a first prefetch processing flag 203f, and a second prefetch processing. It has at least a flag 203g, a prefetching probability variation flag 203h, and a predicted state probability variation flag 203i.

  The reserved ball number counter 203a is used to enter the first entrance 64 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start prize”). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the reference symbol. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S613 in FIG. 24). Then, every time the winning prize is detected and the number of the suspended balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S203 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S204 in FIG. 20). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The sound lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of the change effect without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the hold ball number to the display control device 114 every time the number of hold balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) upon detection of the start winning. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (held) for a maximum of four times ( (See FIG. 6).

  In addition, the holding ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as jackpot lottery, display (variation pattern) setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Each value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the above-mentioned holding ball is used to execute processing such as jackpot lottery and display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one start prize is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type In addition, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of losing, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of big hit are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored. A type counter storage area 203b2 per unit, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In this embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). . That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Similar to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved ball execution area 203c stores a first per-random number counter storage area 203c1, a first per-type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and a variation type counter storage. An area 203c4 is provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the reserved ball. The execution area 203c is shifted to each of the areas 203c1 to 203c4. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22), and the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are set. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first per category counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first per category counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c ends, the holding first area becomes empty, and is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuating effect is made is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, when the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data of the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the changing effect is performed is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. The data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e are a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter stored in the holding ball storage area 203b at the timing when the start winning is detected. C3 is a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1 separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b for use in the “look ahead” process.

  “Prefetching” means that each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is determined in advance before the big hit lottery or the determination of the variation pattern based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the execution start timing of the variation effect. To read. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by the “pre-reading” process, and predict the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result in advance. Based on the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result, various controls such as setting of a continuous notice effect and determination of destruction of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are executed.

  Specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer when the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is detected are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. Then, the MPU 201 also stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e (S207 in FIG. 20). S214). At this time, if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing (including waiting for start of prefetch processing; the same applies hereinafter) are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the first prefetch execution area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in 203d. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are not stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. If there is, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e.

  On the other hand, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Then, the storage process is terminated without storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. In this case, the prefetch process is not executed.

  Whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e are stored is determined by the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203f. This is done by referring to the processing flag 203g. The first prefetching processing flag 203f indicates whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. The second prefetching processing flag 203g is This is a flag indicating whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. When both the first prefetching processing flag 203f and the second prefetching processing flag 203g are on, the counter C1 is prefetching (including waiting for the prefetching processing start) in the corresponding prefetching execution areas 203d and 203e. Indicates that the values of .about.C3 and CS1 are stored. When the value is off, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching processing in the corresponding prefetching execution areas 203d and 203e are not stored.

  The first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203g are set to OFF as initial values in the RAM initial setting processing (S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power is turned on. When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON, and the first prefetch execution area 203d is being prefetched (waiting). ) Counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S208 in FIG. 20). When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, the second prefetch processing flag 203g is set to ON, and the second prefetch execution area 203e is being prefetched (waiting). ) Counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S211 in FIG. 20).

  When the first prefetching processing flag 203f or the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON, the prefetching in the ON state is performed by the prefetching processing (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the processing flags 203f and 203g is prefetched, and the result of the big hit lottery and the determination result of the variation pattern are predicted.

  And the prefetch command mentioned later is produced | generated from the result of the predicted jackpot lottery and the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 executes control for setting execution of the continuous notice effect for the plurality of pending change effects by receiving the prefetch command. Also, the results of jackpot lottery performed based on the prediction results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the pre-read command and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c at the start of variation rendering, By comparing the determination result of the variation pattern, a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 has been destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like is executed.

  Here, the continuous notice effect will be described. The continuous notice effect is a type of notice effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a 15R probable big hit as a result of the fluctuating effect. The same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over a plurality of variation effects. In the present embodiment, a “jellyfish” image is displayed during a variation effect over a plurality of variation effects held at the time of start winning corresponding to the variation effect, including the variation effect that is a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can have a sense of expectation that a big hit is obtained after the continuous notice effect by allowing the player to continuously view the “jellyfish” image immediately after the change stops over a plurality of change displays, The interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a case where a continuous notice effect is performed by displaying a “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 during the change effect over a plurality of change effects will be described. At that time, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the “jellyfish” image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to perform the continuous notice effect. In this case, the “jellyfish” image is displayed at the end of the variation effect over a plurality of variation effects held at the time of the start winning prize corresponding to the variation change, excluding the variation effect that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. May be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by displaying the continuous notice effect image (“jellyfish” image) at the end of the change effect, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as a stop effect of the change effect and the player does not win, By continuously viewing the “Jellyfish” image immediately after the change stops over a plurality of change displays, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous notice effect. Motivation to continue can be given.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 executes a pre-reading process prior to the start of the execution of the fluctuation effect based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the start winning prize, Predict the judgment result. Then, the prediction result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variation effects previously held from the prefetch hold count described later included in the prefetch command, and then predicts the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command. From the result, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for the pending change effect. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be shifted based on the start winning, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various aspects of the continuous notice effect, execution conditions, and the like.

  The details of the setting of the continuous notice effect by the sound lamp control device 113 and the process of determining the destruction of the command will be described later.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched to predict the results of the big win lottery and the variation pattern determination, and when a prefetch command is set, the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set. It is set to OFF, and it is indicated that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. Similarly, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are prefetched to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, and the prefetch command is set, the second prefetch processing is in progress. The flag 203g is set to OFF, indicating that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are not stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Thus, when a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area for the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g set to OFF 203b is stored.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being prefetched are stored in the corresponding prefetch execution area by the first prefetch flag 203f and the second prefetch flag 203g, If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored, the corresponding prefetch execution area is overwritten by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the start winning timing later. Suppress. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 prefetches until the prefetch process is completed even if there is a start prize later. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution areas 203d and 203e are continuously held. Therefore, the prefetching process can be reliably executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, the details of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e will be described with reference to FIG. 6 again. The first prefetch execution area 203d includes a first per random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the first per type counter C2, A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. The second prefetch execution area 203e includes a first per-random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and a first per-type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the first per-type counter C2. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Further, in each of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, the same values as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in these execution areas are held in the holding ball storage area 203b. Pre-read hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided for storing the number of hold cycles to be continued as the pre-read hold count. The number of pre-read hold means the number of hold of the variation effect that is the target of the pre-read process.

  When the MPU 201 detects a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, the MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b, and at that time, the first prefetching processing flag 203f. Is off, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are also stored in the counter storage areas 203d1 to d4 of the first prefetching execution area 203d, respectively. In addition, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the held ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the pre-read hold count storage area 203d5 as the pre-read hold count. The pre-reading processing flag 203f is set to ON.

  Further, when the MPU 201 detects the start winning, the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is on, while the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is off, the reserved ball storage area 203b accompanying the start winning detection. The values stored in the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the counter storage areas 203e1 to e4 of the second prefetching execution area 203e, respectively. Further, the value of the held ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the held ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 as the prefetch hold count, and the second The pre-reading flag 203g is set to on.

  As described above, when the first prefetching process flag 203f or the second prefetching process flag 203g is set to ON, the prefetching process (see FIGS. 26 and 27) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process is performed. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas corresponding to the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected is prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination results are predicted. . Then, based on the predicted jackpot determination result and the result of the variation pattern, a prefetch command including information on the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set prefetch command is set as a voice lamp. It transmits to the control apparatus 113. Details of the prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, prefetching is performed by prefetching each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the varying rendering at the start of the varying rendering. The process was being executed. Further, in the timer interruption process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuating effect and executing a big win lottery, a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and a prefetch process is executed. It is also conceivable to configure to include processing.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected is temporarily stored in either the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the prefetch process is executed in the main process. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interruption processes that are executed with priority over the main process, such as the big win lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect. Run in.

  When the pachinko machine is configured to pre-read each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize and to predict the result of the big win lottery separately from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect In the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning prize and each winning value one by one. In the prefetching process, the prefetched value and the individual winning numbers are separated from the jackpot lottery. It is necessary to compare the values one by one. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big win lottery and the prefetch process, for example, the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the big winning lottery and the prefetching processing.

  Under such circumstances, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winnings detected after the start winnings corresponding to the changing effects at the start of the changing effects as in the conventional gaming machine. If the pre-reading process is used, prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be performed, in parallel with the fact that the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed. There is a risk of affecting the game, for example, the completion of the big hit lottery, which is an important process, is delayed.

  Further, in the timer interruption process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuating effect and executing a big win lottery, a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and a prefetch process is executed. In the case where the process is included, it may occur that the jackpot lottery process and the pre-reading process are performed together in one timer interruption process based on the determination of the start of the variation effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may take a long processing time, in this case, there is a situation in which all the processes included in the timer interrupt process are not completed until the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls necessary for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the prefetch process is executed in the main process, while the big hit lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is performed in the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in a variation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of the processes. Thereby, even if the prefetch process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be reliably completed because it is executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetch process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. However, since the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the game can be normally controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Prefetch processing is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, when the pre-reading process is performed by directly reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b, the execution timing of the changing effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c or another reserved area. Thus, each time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prefetch process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the prefetch process. Even when the production start timing is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f or until the prefetch processing is completed. By setting the second pre-reading process flag 203g to on, even if a new start winning is detected during the pre-reading process, the counter acquired with the new start winning is obtained. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 can suppress overwriting of the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e during the prefetch process. Therefore, the prefetching process can be reliably executed.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203g are on, and the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. Are in the prefetch process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203b with the start winning are used in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area. 203e is also not stored. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning. This is for the process of determining the destruction of the command sent to 113, and does not directly affect the game, so there is no problem.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two prefetch execution areas, the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained at the time of starting winning Is configured to store. Therefore, when a new start prize is detected while the prefetch process is being executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the second prefetch execution area is detected. If 203e is not in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with this new start winning are stored in the second pre-read execution area 203e and stored in the second pre-read execution area 203e. The prefetching process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a set in which the pre-reading process is not executed among the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize and stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, and as many sets as possible On the other hand, the prefetch process can be executed.

  In this embodiment, two prefetch execution areas are prepared, but one prefetch execution area may be provided. In this case, compared to the case where the group in which the pre-reading process is not executed among the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning and stored in the holding ball storage area 203b is prepared with two pre-read execution areas. Although this often occurs, an increase in the storage capacity required for the RAM 203 can be suppressed by using one prefetch execution area.

  Further, three or more pre-read execution areas (less than the number of balls that can be held) may be prepared. For example, when three first to third prefetch execution areas are prepared as the prefetch execution area, the counter value during execution of the prefetch processing is stored in the first prefetch execution area, and the prefetch processing is being executed in the second prefetch execution area. If the counter value is not stored, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the second prefetch execution area, and the prefetch processing is being executed in both the first prefetch execution area and the second prefetch execution area. If the counter value is stored and the counter value during execution of the prefetch process is not stored in the third prefetch execution area, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning prize is stored in the third prefetch execution area. May be. Or you may make it store the value of each counter acquired by starting winning a prize in order of 1st prefetch execution area-> 2nd prefetch execution area-> 3rd prefetch execution area. By preparing three or more pre-read execution areas, it is possible to further suppress the generation of groups in which the pre-read processing is not executed, compared to the case of preparing two pre-read execution areas, and to perform pre-read processing for a larger number of sets. Can be executed.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading execution count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided in the pre-read execution areas 203d and 203e, respectively, and the start winning is detected, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are detected. The value of the held ball number counter 203a at the time of being stored in 203e (the value of the held ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 as the prefetch hold count. . Here, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the variable effect while the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the change start process is executed, 1 is subtracted (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

  As a result, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the same as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding execution area. It is an accurate representation of the number of pending holds. Therefore, when the prefetch command is generated based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the prefetch process and the determination result of the variation pattern, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is included in the prefetch command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the variation effect executed in accordance with the jackpot lottery obtained by the prefetch process and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, when setting the continuous notice effect based on the result of the prefetching process, the start prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process has been performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous notice effect with respect to the fluctuating effect for the previous or previous start winning. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command with respect to the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main controller 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetching has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the variation pattern command or stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, the details of the prefetch command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. The data structure of the prefetch command will be described with the left side in FIG. 8A as the upper byte, the right side as the lower byte, the left side as the upper bit, and the right side as the lower bit.

  The prefetch command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result predicted by the prefetch process from the main controller 110 together with the prefetch suspension count. The prefetch command is composed of 2 bytes as shown in FIG. 8A, and data indicating the prefetch command is stored as the command type in the upper 1 byte. In addition, data indicating the number of pre-reading suspensions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery prediction result), and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination (variation pattern determination prediction result) are stored in the lower 1 byte. Specifically, the number of prefetch holds is indicated by the most significant 2 bits of the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte, and the jackpot determination prediction result is indicated by the lower 3 bits on the lower side following the most significant 2 bits. The fluctuation pattern determination prediction result is shown by the lower 3 bits.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the prefetch hold count indicates that the prefetch hold count is 1 if "00" is stored in the most significant 2 bits of the lower 1 byte, and "01" is stored. If “11” is stored, it indicates that the prefetch hold count is 2, and if “11” is stored, it indicates that the prefetch hold count is “3”. Indicates that there are four.

  As described above, the prefetching process is to predict the jackpot lottery or the like based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 prior to the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, if the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 become 0 during the prefetching process, a big hit lottery or the like at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 during the prefetching process. Means that. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prefetch command is not transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 if the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are 0 or less. Therefore, in the pre-read command, it does not occur when the pre-read hold count is 0, so here, 1-4 times are represented by 2 bits as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the big hit lottery prediction result is “front / rear out” that generates a front / rear outreach if “000” is stored in 3 bits following the 2 most significant bits of the lower byte. If “001” is stored, it means that it is out of the range except “out of back and forth”, that is, out of front and back out, or “other out of” which means complete out of control. "Is stored as" 15R normal jackpot "," 011 "is stored as" 15 chance variable jackpot ", and" 100 "is stored as" 2R probability jackpot ". It is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-read command does not merely notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 that the jackpot lottery prediction result is a losing or jackpot, but in the case of losing, the Or “other misplacement”, and in the case of a jackpot, it is notified whether it is “15R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”, or “2R probability variation jackpot”. Thereby, as compared with the case of simply notifying whether it is a losing or jackpot as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform the execution determination of the continuous notice effect under more detailed conditions, In addition, it is possible to diversify the control that requires prefetching, such as making it possible to make more detailed determination of the destruction of the variation pattern command and stop symbol command received by the audio lamp control device 113 when the variation effect is started. it can. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed in various ways.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot. Although the prefetch command is configured, the prefetch command may be configured to simply notify that it is a big hit. Further, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur during the jackpot, the main controller 110 is divided into “15R jackpot” (15R regular jackpot and 15R probability variation jackpot) and “2R jackpot” (2R probability variation jackpot). The prefetch command may be configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from Or, depending on whether or not the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot is a high probability state, it is divided into “probable jackpot” (15R probability jackpot and 2R probability jackpot) and “normal jackpot” (15R regular jackpot) The prefetch command may be configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110.

  In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the pre-read command is sent so that the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the difference between front and rear and other out. Although it is configured, it is of course possible to configure the prefetch command so as to simply notify that it is off. In addition, the prefetch command may be configured according to whether it is a failure to generate a front / rear out of reach, a failure to generate a reach other than a front / rear out, or a complete release.

  If the information content notified to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is simply reduced to “hit” or “out”, the sound lamp control device 113 Processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, while the audio lamp control device 113 performs the control related to the prefetching, an increase in the control load related to the prefetching can be suppressed, and the processing capability of the audio lamp control device 113 can be directed to other controls. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require prefetching.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command, “notification” is divided into “disappearance that generates a front / rear out of reach”, “disappearance that generates a reach other than out of front / back”, or “completely out”, etc. If the information content to be notified is increased from the case of the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform the execution determination of the continuous notice effect under more detailed conditions than the present embodiment, and also starts the variable effect. In this case, it is possible to make the determination of destruction of the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command received by the sound lamp control device 113 in more detail than in the present embodiment. it can. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed in various ways.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is an error (out of short, out of long) if “000” is stored in the least significant 3 bits of the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command. If “001” is stored, it indicates normal reach, if “010” is stored, it indicates super reach, and if “011” is stored, it is special reach. If “100” is stored, it indicates a 2R fluctuation. In this embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of a big win and the case of a loss, but each reach in the case of a big win and each reach in the case of a loss You may comprise so that it may divide. When each reach in the case of jackpot and each reach in the case of losing are separated, the number of bits allocated to the prediction result of the variation pattern determination increases, but the sound lamp control device 113 starts the variation effect. In this case, it is possible to perform the destruction determination of the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command received by the voice lamp control device 113 in more detail. In addition, when the execution determination of the continuous notice effect in the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to take into account the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, the type of the prediction result of the variation pattern determination notified by the prefetch command is set. By increasing the number, it is possible to perform execution determination of the continuous notice effect under more detailed conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the control that requires prefetching, it is possible to make the control in the sound lamp control device 113 more diverse.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command is obtained after ascertaining the number of pending variation effects previously retained from the prefetch suspension count included in the prefetch command. Based on the above, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the pending variable effect previously held.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command with respect to the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command. As a result, it is possible to associate the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetch is performed. Therefore, it is possible to include the prefetch command by determining whether or not the variation pattern command or stop type command received from the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. It is possible to determine whether the received command is not destroyed.

  For example, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is out of normal reach and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetching process is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the variation pattern command is obtained by the prefetching processing. It is determined that the prediction result of the predicted jackpot lottery does not match, and it can be determined that one or both of the look-ahead command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of normal reach, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is the same even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process is “other out of play”. If it is “off”, it is determined that the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetching process, and either or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Can be determined.

  Also, for example, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “completely missed”, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetch process is “out of front and back”, the stop type command is set to the prefetch process. It can be determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by is not matched, and it can be determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command is destroyed. In addition, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “completely missed”, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetching process is “other miss”, the variation pattern determination forecast result is “ If it is “normal reach”, it is determined that the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch process, and it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 executes the prefetch process, and includes the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch process in the prefetch command. By transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The prefetching probability change flag 203h is a flag that indicates a gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetched counter value when performing prefetching processing. . When the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off, the predicted gaming state is in a low probability state. When the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is on, the predicted gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state). Indicates that

  In the main control device 110, when the prefetch processing is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the main control device 110 refers to the prefetch probability change flag 203h. . If the prefetching probability change flag 203h is off, it is predicted that the gaming state that can be assumed by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched is in a low probability state. Therefore, after setting the winning value to “7,307,582”, the result of the big hit lottery is predicted. On the other hand, if the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on, the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched becomes a high probability state (probability variation state). Since it is predicted that there is a hit value, the winning value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596. , 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "and predicting the result of the big hit lottery (see S752, S762 in FIG. 26).

  The prefetching probability change flag 203h is displayed in the prediction result of the big hit lottery in this prefetching process after it is initialized to off in the initial setting of the RAM (see S613) of the start-up process (see FIG. 24) executed after power-on. The settings are changed accordingly. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the processing of S752 and S762 of the look-ahead process in FIG. 26 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state is in a high probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed ( Therefore, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set to ON (see S755 and S765 in FIG. 26). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is other jackpot, that is, the 15R normal jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h Is set to OFF (S757 and S767 in FIG. 26). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of place, it is predicted that the gaming state will be maintained as it is, so the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S756 of FIG. 26: branch of Yes, S766). : Yes branch).

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prefetching process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the changing effects, the prefetching probability change is based only on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the processes of S752 and S762. If the value of the flag 203h is set, the prediction of the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be greatly deviated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the value of the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted. .

  Specifically, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state), the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is off. For example, it can be presumed that the pre-reading process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the original jackpot lottery was performed. Therefore, in this case, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON and prefetching processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual big hit lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched is performed. The obtained gaming state is set to a high probability state (probability variation state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

  In addition, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to a low probability state, if the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is on, the original jackpot lottery is performed. It can be estimated that the prefetching processing is not executed for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, in this case, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF and prefetching processing is performed, the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched is taken. The obtained gaming state is set to a low probability state (see S408 in FIG. 22). Note that if the result of the original big hit lottery is out of place, the value of the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is maintained as it is. Thereby, even when the pre-reading process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the changing effects, the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted with higher accuracy. Can be done.

  If the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state), the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is turned off. When the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON, or when the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to a low probability state, the prefetching probability change flag 203h is ON. Therefore, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, it means that the prefetching processing is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the original jackpot lottery has been performed. Until then, there is a high possibility that the prefetching probability variation flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result by the pre-reading performed before that including the pre-reading being executed in the main process is predicted based on an erroneous game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is highly possible that

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in such a case, that is, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state). When the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set to on, or the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot), and the gaming state is in a low probability state. If the prefetching probability change flag 203h is turned on when the transition is made, and the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, the first prefetching processing flag 203d and the second prefetching processing flag 203e are set to OFF and prediction is performed. The state change flag 203i is set to ON (see S409 to S411 in FIG. 22).

  The prediction state change flag 203i is a flag that indicates that there is a high possibility that the prefetching performed previously including the prefetching that is currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. . The predicted state change flag 203i is initialized to off and normally kept off in the initial setting of the RAM (see S613) of the startup process (see FIG. 24) executed after power-on. In the above-described case, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON, which indicates that there is a high possibility that the prefetching performed previously is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect.

  In the prefetch process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process, the MPU 201 prefetches the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. If it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON during the time, the prefetching is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). Thereby, it can suppress that prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process, the MPU 201 sets a prediction state change command, and the sound lamp control device 113 (see S772 in FIG. 27).

  The prediction state change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that there is a high possibility that the prediction result by the prefetching performed before that is likely to be incorrect. As will be described in detail later, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction result of the prefetching process notified by the above-described prefetching command in the prefetching information storage area 223b, and the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that have performed the prefetching. The prediction result is continuously held until the actual jackpot lottery or the like is performed and the fluctuation is started. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, all the prediction results by the prefetching process stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time are set to invalid. Thereby, it can suppress that various control by prefetching is performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous notice effect execution set at that time. Although the details will be described later, the decision to execute the continuous notice effect is that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received prefetch command when the prefetch command is received is a 15R probability variable jackpot, or it is out of front or back. In the case of a predetermined rate. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of fluctuation change. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the predictive state change command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 is likely to have an incorrect prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command, and is thus set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be “15R probability variation jackpot” in the last variation effect, or even if it is missed, it will not be “rear out of reach”. . As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  When the main control device 110 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process, the counter held in the holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the correct state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10, the prefetching process is executed again using C1 to C3 and CS1. Specifically, out of the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of one reserved area where various counter values are reserved are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. Transfer is performed, the number of holdings corresponding to the holding area is stored as the number of pre-reading holdings in the pre-reading holding number storage area 203d5, and the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is set to ON. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of other holding areas in which various counter values are held are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the number of prefetch holds is set as the number of prefetch holds corresponding to the hold area. The data is stored in the storage area 203e5, and the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON (see FIG. 27).

  In the present embodiment, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 4, and the counter values corresponding to the four reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, they are stored in the reserved third area. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 3 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set. In addition to being set to ON, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 4 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. And the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved second area are stored. The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved third area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, 3 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e, The second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 2, and the counter values corresponding to the two reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are stored. The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one reserved ball is reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the second prefetch processing flag 203g is kept off. When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203f. 2. The pre-reading processing flag 203g is kept off.

  As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch execution area corresponding to the transferred prefetch execution area. By setting the prefetching process flag 203f or the second prefetching process flag 203g to ON, the prefetching is performed again based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are transferred in the prefetching process to be executed next. Can do. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203f, the correct value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on this, prefetching processing is executed, and the sound lamp control device 113 can be notified of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it respond | corresponds to the holding ball most recently held and the holding ball hold | maintained one before the holding ball from the several holding balls currently hold | maintained in the holding ball storage area 203b. The prefetching is performed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, by limiting the target to be pre-read again to two reserved balls, it is possible to reduce the processing burden related to the pre-read again. Further, since the processing time related to the pre-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the pre-reading is performed again for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning. It is possible to minimize the situation where prefetching is not performed.

  In addition, since the pre-reading is performed again on the recently held ball, when the number of held balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the held ball that has been read-ahead again are stored. Based on the value, there is a time margin before the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the possibility that the prefetching will be completed again before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of many jackpot lottery and prediction results of the variation pattern determination. Can be increased. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of held balls held in the held ball storage area 203b, the most recently held ball and the held ball held immediately before the held ball are supported. Although the prefetching is performed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the counter values may be stored in the prefetch execution area in order from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area with a smaller area number. As a result, the pre-reading process can be executed in order from the counter value immediately before the original lottery is executed, so that it is possible to obtain a prediction result for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in which the original lottery is executed earlier. Can be increased.

  When there are three or more holds in the holding ball storage area 203b, the prefetching is executed again only for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding first area and the holding second area. Also good. As a result, the burden of processing relating to re-reading can be reduced. Further, since the processing time related to the pre-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the pre-reading is performed again for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning. It is possible to minimize the situation where prefetching is not performed. Further, when there are three or more holds in the holding ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the holding first English and the holding second areas once in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. The value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the remaining reserved areas is transferred to the pre-read execution area where the pre-read processing has been completed and the pre-read is executed again. May be. Thereby, since pre-reading can be performed again for all the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 can use more prediction results and more various types of predictions. Control can be performed.

  The prediction state change flag 203i is set to OFF after the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that perform prefetching again are set in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. On the other hand, the predicted state change flag 203i is referred to in a start winning process (see FIG. 20) which is a process of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. In the start winning process, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by detecting the start winning are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, if the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the holding ball storage area 203b. Are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203f is turned on. The setting process is not executed (see S207 in FIG. 20: Yes).

  Thus, before the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning are Storage in the execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e can be suppressed. Therefore, when the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON, the prefetching can be executed again reliably using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  In addition, after the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again are set in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to OFF, so that the first After the prefetching is performed again by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning are used. Since the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203 is stored and the first pre-reading processing flag 203e or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g can be set to ON, the counters C1 to C1 acquired with the start winning Prefetching can be performed on the values of C3 and CS1.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, vibration sensor 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the entrance is an important factor for determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a continuous notice determination table 222a. In addition, the RAM 223 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 223a, a prefetch information storage area 223b, a continuous notice lottery counter 223c, a single notice lottery counter 223d, a continuous notice execution counter 223e, and a single notice execution flag 223d.

  The continuous notice determination table 222a is a table for determining execution of the continuous notice effect together with the continuous notice lottery counter 223c when a prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. Details thereof will be described later together with the description of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the reserved ball number counter 223a.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the held ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 by adding the number of held balls for variation display by entering the first entrance 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the main controller 110 holds the The number of held balls in the variable display) is stored in the held ball number counter 223a (see S1016 in FIG. 31).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the held ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied with the reception. When the display mode of the display device 81 is set, 1 is subtracted from the value of the held ball number counter 223a (see S1108 in FIG. 33). Thus, since the value of the held ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored ball count counter 223a after the storage or after the update, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1751 in FIG. 44A). As described above, the value of the held ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The prefetch information storage area 223b is predicted by the main control device 110 by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning, and is indicated by the prefetch command transmitted by the main control device 110. This is an area for storing information indicating the prediction results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination.

  This prefetch information storage area 223b is used in the sound lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed. The sound lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command has been destroyed, and the variation effect is switched to a special effect. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b with the stop type indicated by the stop type command received from the main control device 110. If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command has been destroyed, and the variable effect is switched to a special effect.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The prefetch information storage area 223b has five areas of prefetch information 0th to 4th areas. Each prefetch information 0th to 4th area is provided with at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, a variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and a prefetch information valid flag. The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area are areas for storing information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and information indicating the prediction result of variation pattern determination, respectively. The prefetch information valid flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination stored in each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is valid. It shows that the prediction result is valid. The prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information areas 0 to 4 are all set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on.

  In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b2)) as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored. In other words, if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch command is out of front or back, “000” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and if the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch command is other than that, When “001” is stored in the prediction result storage area and the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch command is 15R normal jackpot, “010” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the jackpot lottery prediction of the prefetch command When the result is 15R probability variation jackpot, “011” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and when the jackpot lottery prediction result of the pre-read command is 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area indicates “ 100 "is stored.

  In the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b3)) as the data indicating the variation pattern determination prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored. That is, when the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is out of place (out of short, out of long), “000” is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is normal reach. Is “001” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and “010” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area when the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is super reach. When the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is stored in the special reach, “011” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is 2R probability variation. In the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, “100” is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the data indicating the jackpot lottery prediction result and the variation pattern determination prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored in the jackpot lottery. Although it is stored as information indicating the prediction result and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, it is not necessarily limited to this, and data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command is different. After conversion into data, the converted data may be stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area as information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. .

  In addition, out of the contents of the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the prefetch command, only the information used for determining the destruction of the command may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, when judging the destruction of a command without distinguishing between “out of front and back” and “other out of” as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, but simply referring to “out”, “out of front and back” and “other out of” May be stored together in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area as “miss”. Similarly, out of the contents of the variation pattern determination prediction result indicated by the prefetch command, only information used for command destruction determination may be extracted and stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area. For example, if you do not distinguish between “super reach” and “special reach” as prediction results of fluctuation pattern determination, but simply refer to them as reach other than normal reach, “super reach” and “special reach” will be combined into “super reach”. It may be stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area as “special reach”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of receiving the prefetch command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the continuous notice effect execution based on the information notified by the prefetch command, and is notified by the prefetch command. Information is stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b, and the destruction of the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is determined. The jackpot lottery used for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination The information used may differ depending on the jackpot lottery used in the destruction determination of the command or the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. For example, part of the information on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination used in the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect may not be used in the destruction determination of the command. Therefore, in such a case, if only the information necessary for the destruction determination of the command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b among the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination notified by the prefetching command, the destruction determination of the command is performed. The storage capacity of the prefetch information storage area 223b can be suppressed to be small while performing reliably.

  Now, of the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas, the pre-read information fourth area includes information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the pre-read process for the variation effect with the holding count of four times. These are respectively stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. That is, the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Is stored in the prefetch information fourth area.

  In addition, in the pre-read information first to third areas, similarly to the pre-read information fourth area, prediction of jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading for each variation effect of 1 to 3 hold times. Information indicating the results is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by prefetching each counter value stored in the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Is stored in the pre-reading information third area, and information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the holding second area of the holding ball storage area 203b. Pre-read information stored in the second area and information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is pre-read. Information is stored in the first area.

  On the other hand, in the pre-read information 0th area, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery drawing and the variation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading with respect to the variation effect immediately before or during the execution is respectively a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and a variation pattern. Stored in the judgment prediction result storage area. That is, the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by prefetching each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are shown. Information is stored in the pre-read information 0th area.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the area corresponding to the prefetch hold count included in the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas, and Information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command and information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. In addition, the prefetch information valid flag of the area where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is stored is set to ON, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination stored in the area is valid. Indicates.

  In the present embodiment, the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is directly copied to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command is directly used as the variation pattern. By copying to the determination prediction result storage area, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are easily stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. .

  Note that the big hit lottery data included in the look-ahead command is different from the data indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, as information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery and information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. When storing in the prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, processing was performed to convert the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command to the other data. Then, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the conversion and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area.

  The number of prefetching suspensions included in the prefetching command accurately represents the number of suspensions of the variable effects that have been prefetched by the main controller 110 as described above. Therefore, by storing the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command in the area corresponding to the prefetch hold count of the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas, these results are predicted. Thus, it is possible to reliably store the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination in the area corresponding to the number of times the variation effect is held.

  On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the data of the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b are respectively read in the pre-read information 0th to 4th. A process of shifting to three areas is executed. In this shift processing, first, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first area and the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information 0th area, the prefetch information The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information 0th area.

  When the data shift to the prefetch information 0th area is completed, the prefetch information first area becomes empty, and therefore information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the prefetch information second to fourth areas; , The information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag, respectively, the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the first to third areas of the prefetch information having a smaller area number, respectively. And by storing in the prefetch information valid flag, the data of the prefetch information second to fourth areas are shifted to the prefetch information first to third areas, respectively. Furthermore, the prefetch information fourth area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information fourth area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate this, the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF.

  When a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, it means that one variation effect on hold is started to be executed. Specifically, in the main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is stored. Based on the values of .about.C3 and CS1, determination of variation patterns and stop types in jackpot lottery and variation effects is performed.

  Therefore, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the shift process described above is executed between the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas of the pre-read information storage area 223b. In the pre-read information first to fourth areas, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effects each having the number of holding times of 1 to 4 can be stored. Information indicating prediction results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effect corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be stored in the pre-read information 0th area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, The variation pattern of the displayed variation effect is compared with the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the pre-read information 0th area, and they match. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed. If the two do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command among the commands received from the main controller 110 are destroyed, and the variation effect mode is switched to the special variation effect. .

  Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 after the change pattern command, the stop type of the symbol after the change effect indicated by the stop type command and the pre-read information 0th are displayed. The main control device by comparing the jackpot lottery predicted by prefetching and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination with respect to the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the area, and determining whether or not they match Whether the command received from 110 has been destroyed can be determined. If the two do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command among the commands received from the main control device 110 are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. .

  In this embodiment, the special variation effect that is switched when it is determined that the command is destroyed is a confirmed command transmitted from the main control device 110 (a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect). This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol until the command (command for confirming display) is received. Further, in the special variation effect, in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command, a special stop symbol (eg, symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114 to change the effect or stop symbol. May not be able to be confirmed. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the variation display. Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is off, it is possible to prevent the jackpot confirmed display effect from being erroneously performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main controller 110 is a big win, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue playing with peace of mind. In addition, by making the final display a special stop symbol, even if the final display is off, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state. The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the confirmation display being out of order, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  In the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the command is destroyed in response to the reception of the variation pattern command or the stop type command, the pre-read information information It is determined whether or not the pre-read information valid flag for area 0 is on. And only when the prefetch information valid flag is on, the command is destroyed based on the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot determination stored in the prefetch information 0th area or the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been performed.

  The reason why the prefetch information valid flag is used is as follows. That is, in the main control device 110, the prefetching process is not performed in the timer interruption process for executing the process such as the detection of the start winning prize or the big hit lottery process, but the process performed over time in the main process. It is. Thereby, depending on the detection timing of the start winning, there may occur a case where the pre-reading process is not performed on the fluctuating effect held by the starting winning. Therefore, when the prefetch process is not performed for the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern or the stop type by the variation pattern command or the stop type command, the prefetch information in the 0th to 4th areas is triggered by the reception of the variation pattern command. On the other hand, after the shift is performed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery to be predicted by the prefetching or the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is not stored in the prefetch information 0th area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift is temporarily set to OFF and a prefetch command is received, among the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas, In the area corresponding to the prefetch hold count indicated by the prefetch command, information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the prefetch command is stored in the big hit determination storage area and the prefetch information valid flag is set to ON. . Each time a variation pattern command is received, the value of the prefetch information valid flag is shifted between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas together with the information included in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the like.

  As a result, when a variation pattern command or a stop type command is received, the result of jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination is predicted by prefetching for the variation effect corresponding to the received command, and information indicating the prediction result Can be easily determined based on the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information 0th area. Therefore, it can be easily suppressed that the determination as to whether or not the command is destroyed is based on information that is not valid, and the determination can be performed easily and reliably.

  In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command from the main control device 110, the main control device 110 indicates that there is a high possibility that the prediction result by the prefetch indicated by the prefetch commands received so far is erroneous. It is determined that the notification has been received, and processing for invalidating each prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time is executed (see S1021 and S1022 in FIG. 31). Specifically, the prefetch information valid flags of all the prefetch information 0th area to fourth area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set to OFF. This makes it possible to invalidate all the various prediction results stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time, so that the audio lamp control device 113 performs prefetching such as command destruction determination based on the erroneous prediction results. It is possible to prevent various controls from being performed. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch information valid flag is used to indicate whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is valid. However, by storing data other than information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, prediction of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination stored in the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas It may indicate that the information indicating the result is not valid, or by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area, It may be shown that the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination stored in the 0th to fourth areas is not valid.

  For example, “111” data is not defined in the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. Therefore, when “111” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the pre-read information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift, and when it is determined whether or not the command is destroyed, If data of “111” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0th area, the prefetch information 0th area relates to information on the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of variation pattern determination. It may be determined that the information is not stored effectively.

  As described above, information other than information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, or information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is stored in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area. If it is shown that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination stored in the pre-read information areas 0 to 4 is not valid by storing data other than the pre-read information valid flag Therefore, the increase in the storage capacity of the RAM 223 due to the provision of the prefetch information storage area 223b can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The continuous notice lottery counter 223c is a counter used for determining execution of the continuous notice effect, and zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (S810 in FIG. 28). The continuous notice lottery counter 223c is repeatedly updated during the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). The continuous notice lottery counter 223c is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 127).

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a continuous notice determination process (S1020 in FIG. 31) for determining execution of the continuous notice effect. In this continuous notice determination process, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the received prefetch command is 15R probability variation big hit or out of front and back, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time and the continuous notice determination described below Based on the table 222a, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined at a predetermined rate (see FIG. 32).

  It should be noted that the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is 15R probability change big hit or out of front and back, so that the 15R probability change big hit having the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be expected. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of fluctuation change. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  The continuous notice determination table 222a is a table for setting the “continuous notice determination probability” when the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is 15R probability change big hit or out of front and back. . Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous notice effect. The audio lamp control device 113 compares the continuous notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is within the range indicated by the continuous notice determination table 222a, It is determined to cause the symbol display device 81 to execute the continuous notice effect (see S1038 and S1039 in FIG. 32).

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 10, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables, a big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and a losing time continuous notice determination table 222a2. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, and when the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the prefetch command is 15R probability change big hit or out of front or back, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is 15R probability change. One table used for setting the continuous notice determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous notice determination table 222a, depending on whether the game is a big hit or not. That is, if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is 15R probability variable big hit, the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected, and if the predicted result of the big hit lottery is out of front and back, the continuous notice notice determination table 222a2 when lost is selected. (See S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit” or “out”).

  The big hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the losing continuous notice determination table 222a2 both correspond to the respective values “1” to “4” that can be taken by the number of prefetch hold of the prefetch command (the number of prefetched variation effects). In addition, the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c that determines the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined respectively.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot time continuous notice determination table 222a1 defines “0-7” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the prefetch hold count “1”, and sets the prefetch hold count “2”. Correspondingly, “0 to 15” is specified as the continuous notice determination range, and “0 to 39” is specified as the continuous notice determination range and “0 to 39” is associated with the number of prefetch reservations “3”. In addition, “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  Further, the out-of-track continuous notice determination table 222a2 defines “0-3” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the prefetch hold count “1”, and associates with the prefetch hold count “2”, and the continuous notice decision. The range is defined as “0-9”, is associated with the prefetch hold count “3”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-25”, is associated with the prefetch hold count “4”, and the continuous notice determination is performed. The range is defined as “0 to 39”.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 selects one of the big-hit continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 222a2 as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability, the pre-reading is performed from the selected successive notice determination table. The continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the prefetch hold count included in the command is specified, and execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range. To do.

  Now, in both the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. If the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, and the probability of continuous notice determination is increased. It can be said that the greater the number of times the variable control is held in the main control device 110, the higher the probability of continuous notice determination.

  Here, the continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the continuous notice determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined even when the prefetch suspension count is 1 (that is, the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is performed is 1). Has been. Here, when the prefetch hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as it is, the fluctuation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the fluctuating effect in which the prefetch process is performed to generate the prefetch command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be obtained after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, which may diminish the expectation of the player's continuous notice effect on the “jellyfish” image. There is.

  On the other hand, as will be described in detail later, when the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is on, the execution of the one-shot notice effect is performed in the variation effect that is being executed or is being executed at that time, or in the last effect effect that has been executed. Means that it is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the prefetch suspension count is 1 (that is, when the number of fluctuating effects for which the continuous notice effect is performed is 1), execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and the single notice at that time is determined. When the execution flag 223f is on, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect for which the pre-read process has been performed. As a result, the “jellyfish” image in the single notice effect can be displayed in the previous change effect, and the “jellyfish” image in the continuous notice effect can be displayed in the subsequent change effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear as if the continuous notice effect is performed over two consecutive variable effects, and the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit of 15R probability change.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the number of reading suspension is one (that is, the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is performed is 1), the single notice execution flag 223f at that time is off. In this case, in the present embodiment, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous notice effect, is not displayed with respect to the fluctuating effect that has been subjected to the prefetching process. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has for the “jellyfish” image from diluting.

  In addition, when comparing the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the outage continuous notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. The determination table 222a1 is defined to be the same or wider than the continuation advance notice determination table 222a2. That is, the probability of continuous notice determination when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is the same as or more than the probability of decision of continuous notice when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out” Is set to be higher.

  As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to become a “hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the determination made when winning the ball to the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is more than the probability of “losing”. Is set to a small value, so if the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. The continuous notice effect can be easily performed.

  Thus, in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by prefetching performed when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 is not only a jackpot, but also in the case of a back and forth miss, Also, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be determined. That is, the continuous notice effect can be executed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. Moreover, even if it is a case where it loses as a result of a lottery, it can prevent that a player becomes bored by performing a continuous notice effect.

  The single notice lottery counter 223d is a counter used for determining execution of the single notice effect. The single announcement effect is an effect of displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 during the variation effect, as in the case of the continuous notice effect. However, while the continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuating effects, the single notice effect is performed with only one fluctuating effect.

  The single notice lottery counter 223d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (S810 in FIG. 28). The single notice lottery counter 223d is repeatedly updated during the main process (see FIG. 29) of the audio lamp control device 113 (S914). The single notice lottery counter 223c is updated, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 14, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 14).

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the change pattern command for notifying the start of the change effect from the main control device 110, the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d at that time is 10 in the change display process (see FIG. 33). If there is, the execution of the single notice effect is determined (see S1111). That is, when the one-off notice lottery counter 223d is updated within the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the one-off notice effect is determined with a probability of 1/15. Then, when the sound lamp control device 113 decides to execute the single notice effect, the same “jellyfish” image as the continuous notice effect is displayed with the fluctuating effect with respect to the change effect for which the execution of the single notice effect is decided. As such, the display control device 114 is notified. Specifically, a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Accordingly, the “jellyfish” image is displayed with the variation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114.

  Here, when attention is paid to one variation effect, both the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect coincide with each other in that the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the change effect. As a result, when a “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “jellyfish” image displayed in the continuous notice effect is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while considering whether it is a “image” or a “jellyfish” image displayed in a single notice effect. When the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next variation effect, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. .

  In the present embodiment, even when execution of a single notice effect is determined, a continuous notice command that is a command for displaying a “jellyfish” image with respect to a fluctuating effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is displayed. 114. That is, even if execution of the continuous notice effect is set for one change effect or when execution of the single notice effect is decided, the “Jellyfish” image is changed on the display control device 114 using the same command. An instruction to display the effect is given. This is because the present embodiment is configured to transmit a continuous notice command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 for each variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, and a one-shot notice effect. Is made possible by displaying the “jellyfish” image for the variation effect in the same manner as the continuous notice effect. In this way, by performing the instruction of the continuous notice effect and the instruction of the single notice effect using the same continuous notice command, the number of commands transmitted by the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the type of the command is stored. ROM capacity can be reduced, and a program used in the audio lamp control device 113 and a program used in the display control device 114 that receives the continuous notice command can be simplified.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, if it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed by the destruction determination of the command, the execution of the single notice effect is determined. In addition, it is configured such that a single notice effect is not performed with a variation effect started by the variation pattern command (see S1110: Yes, S1121 in FIG. 33). In addition, when a stop type command is received, if it is determined that one or both of the read-ahead command and the stop type command is destroyed by the destruction determination of the command, the execution of the single notice effect is determined. However, the display control device 114 is not notified of the display of the “jellyfish” image (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

  Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-described special variation effect is performed, when the “Jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, normally It may be a rare effect that a “jellyfish” image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, and it is unclear what gaming state will be given after the end of the special variation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive expectation that it will be a big hit. And when it comes off as a result, a player may be disappointed and there is a possibility that the interest in a game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed in such a case, so that it is possible to go to the game without giving the player a big expectation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the case of a configuration in which the continuous notice effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the change effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, It is preferable that the “Jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol. In other words, it is preferable that the single notice effect is performed only for one variable effect as the continuous notice effect. As a result, when a single notice effect is performed, or when a continuous notice effect set over a plurality of variable effects is started, the player is expected to expect whether or not this will develop into a continuous notice effect. Can do.

  The continuous notice execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of fluctuating effects for performing the continuous notice effect when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and is an initial setting process (see FIG. 28) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. S810) sets zero as the initial value. When the sound lamp control device 223e decides to execute the continuous notice effect, the sound lamp control device 223e adds 1 to the number of prefetch suspensions (that is, the number of variable effects that cause the continuous notice effect to be executed) included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision. The added value is stored in the continuous notice execution counter 223e (see S1042 in FIG. 32). In addition, when the variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation effect is received from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e during the variation display process.

  As a result, if the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1, the continuous notice command is displayed to the display control device 114 so that the “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect started to be executed by the variation pattern command. Is transmitted (S1114 in FIG. 33). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e (S1116 in FIG. 33).

  In other words, if the number of prefetch hold when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined is “4”, “5” is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of prefetch hold. Similarly, if the number of prefetch hold when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined is “1” to “3”, the continuous notice execution counter 223e adds “1” to “1” to the number of prefetch hold. 4 "is set. Each time a variation pattern command is received, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is confirmed. If it is larger than 1, the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by one. Repeat the process.

  As a result, when the continuous notice execution counter 223e is set to “5” when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the four fluctuation effects. Similarly, if the continuous notice execution counter 223e is set to any one of “2” to “4” when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the “jellyfish” "The image is displayed. In other words, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed over all the variation effects that have been put on hold before the variation effect for which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a continuous notice effect.

  If the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e confirmed when the change pattern command is received is 1, the execution of a new continuous notice effect is not performed, and execution of the single notice effect is determined, for example. Even if it is, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without transmitting the continuous notice command to the display control device 114. Further, when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e confirmed when the change pattern command is received is 0, the continuous notice command to the display control device 114 is displayed except when the execution of the single notice effect is determined. Transmission is not performed, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. When the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0, when the execution of a new continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice execution counter 223e executes the execution decision so that the continuous notice effect is executed. A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of prefetch suspensions (that is, the number of fluctuating effects for executing the continuous notice effect) included in the prefetch command serving as a trigger is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision (that is, the number of variable effects that cause the continuous notice effect to be executed). ) Is not set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e. Then, each time a variation pattern command which is an instruction to start a variation effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. If the value is larger than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. The continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed at the same time, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. 1 is subtracted from the value of. Further, while the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous notice command is not transmitted except when the execution of the single notice effect is determined, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. .

  As a result, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pre-reading suspensions (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the value is simply subtracted by one each time the change effect is started. Depending on the value, the display of the image related to the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, or after the end of the continuous notice effect, It is possible to easily perform control so as not to display an image related to the continuous notice effect, or to cancel the control. Therefore, since a program for performing such control can be easily constructed, it is possible to prevent the overall configuration of the program from being complicated by performing such control.

  The effects of configuring the continuous notice execution counter 223e in this way will be described below. In the conventional pachinko machine, when setting the execution of the continuous notice effect, if the continuous notice execution counter is set to the continuous notice execution counter as it is and the continuous notice execution counter is larger than 0 when the change effect is executed, While performing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect, the value of the continuous notice execution counter is decremented by 1, so that the continuous notice effect is executed over the initially set number of variable effects. When configured in this way, after one continuous notice effect is completed, the continuous notice effect may start again, that is, the continuous notice effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variation effect in the first continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and if the last variation effect in the subsequent second continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player You will have a feeling of That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variation effect in the first continuous notification effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that the single notification effect is performed in the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed and lost once as a result of the first continuous notice effect will continue the game with the assumption that the continuous notice effect will continue by looking at the display of the single notice effect. Although there is a possibility, since the image for the continuous notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's intention will be betrayed as a result. In this way, by configuring as described above, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be lowered as a result.

  Further, the conventional pachinko machine may cause the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start prize (entering the first entrance slot 64) is generated during the variation effect and the variation effect associated with the start prize is suspended. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the following special effects can be obtained. That is, when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of prefetch suspensions (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision. The continuous notice execution counter 223e is set, and every time a variation pattern command that is an instruction to start the fluctuation effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, a continuous notice command is transmitted. After the continuous notice effect is performed by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e, “Jellyfish” is always performed in one variation effect. Image can be prevented from being displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous notice effect is finished, it can be suppressed that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously generated, It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player holds.

  In addition, after completion of the continuous notice effect, by setting the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect according to the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect, the operation is started. Even if the image of the continuous notice effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue playing the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when it is configured to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of each variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous notice effect is provided. When the execution is determined, the prefetch suspension count included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution determination may be set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as it is. In this case, since the “jellyfish” image is not displayed in the variation effect that is the trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect, the number of change effects that cause the continuous notice effect to be executed is one less than the number of pre-reading suspensions. Therefore, in this case as well, it can be said that what is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e is a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command is destroyed by the destruction determination of the command, and it is determined that the special variation effect is performed. Regardless of the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e, the setting of the continuous notice effect is not performed, and the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the change effect started by the change pattern command. (See S1110: Yes in FIG. 33).

  In this case, only the process of updating the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is executed (S1120). That is, if the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0, the value of 0 is held. Thereby, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed in the change effect, the number of change effects for which the continuous notice effect is performed can be reliably counted by the continuous notice execution counter 223e. Therefore, even when the destruction of the command is determined and the “Jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in some of the variation effects for which the continuous notice effect is set, The continuous notice effect can be continuously performed toward the fluctuating effect that is a trigger for determining the execution of the notice effect.

  In addition, when a stop type command is received, it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command is destroyed due to the destruction of the command, and a special change effect is also performed. Based on the value of the execution counter 223e, even if the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect related to the stop type command (that is, even if the continuous notice execution flag is on), the “jellyfish” image The display is not notified to the display control device 114 (see S1009: No in FIG. 31).

  Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-described special variation effect is performed, when the “Jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, normally It may be a rare effect that a “jellyfish” image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, and it is unclear what gaming state will be given after the end of the special variation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive expectation that it will be a big hit. And when it comes off as a result, a player may be disappointed and there is a possibility that the interest in a game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed in such a case, so that it is possible to go to the game without giving the player a big expectation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous notice effect execution set at that time. Specifically, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31). As described above, when the pre-reading command is received, the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received pre-reading command is 15R probability variation jackpot or out of front and back. In addition, it is performed at a predetermined rate. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of fluctuation change. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the predictive state change command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 is likely to have an incorrect prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command, and is thus set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be “15R probability variation jackpot” in the last variation effect, or even if it is missed, it will not be “rear out of reach”. . As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  The single notice execution flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the single notice effect is executed. When the flag is on, it means that the single notice effect is set. When the flag is off, the single notice effect is set. Means not. The single notice execution flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (S810 in FIG. 28). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the change pattern command for notifying the start of the change effect from the main control device 110, the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d at that time is referred to in the change display process (see FIG. 33). To do. If the value is 10, the execution of the single notice effect is determined and the single notice execution flag 223f is set to ON. If the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is a value other than 10, the continuous notice effect is given. It is determined not to execute, and the single notice execution counter 223f is set to OFF (see S1111 to S1113).

  When the single notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 only when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0. Thereby, even if the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not made, it is possible to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 in a single variation effect by the control of the display control device 114. .

  In the variation display process, when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is greater than 1, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set over a plurality of variation effects including the change effect, as described above. Regardless of whether the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is on or off, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in this embodiment, in this case, the continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 without considering the setting of the single notice execution flag 223f.

  In the variation display process, when the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 1, the variation effect is a variation effect performed after the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set as described above. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is controlled not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether the single notice execution flag 223f is on or off.

  Thereby, after the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Thus, it is possible to suppress the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation for the continuous notice effect held by the player, which is caused by continuously performing the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect.

  In addition, after completion of the continuous notice effect, by setting the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect according to the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect, the operation is started. Even if the image of the continuous notice effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  The RAM 223, in addition, a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or that the variable effect should be started in the on state. A change start flag (not shown) indicating that the change effect is switched to the special change effect in the ON state, and a continuous notice effect for the change effect starting to change in the ON state. For example, a continuous notice execution flag (not shown) is set.

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1002 in FIG. 31). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 33).

  The special variation flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the prediction of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted by the pre-read process for the variation effect The result is compared, and if they do not match, it is set to ON (S1106 in FIG. 33). When the special variation effect is set as the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (S1006 in FIG. 31).

  The continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the special fluctuation flag is not turned on (that is, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). When the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is larger than 1, the continuous notice execution flag is set. It is set to ON (S1115 in FIG. 33). When a stop type command specifying the stop type of the variation effect instructed to start by the variation pattern command is received, the stop type of the variation effect indicated by the stop type command and the prefetch for the variation effect If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination predicted by the process is matched and the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON, the “Jellyfish” image varies on the third symbol display device 81. After setting to transmit the continuous notice command to be displayed in the effect to the display control device 114, the continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF (see S1009, S1011 to S1014 in FIG. 31).

  Also, when the stop type command is received, the stop type of the variation effect indicated by the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch processing for the variation effect. In this case, in the variation effect related to the stop type command, the execution setting of the continuous notice effect is invalidated, and the continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF without setting the continuous notice command (S1009, S1010 in FIG. 31). reference).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect or a continuous effect. Controls the notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) Instead of providing and storing the ROM 22) of Patent Document 1 described above, it is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234 a 2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 and is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the image ROM to be stored can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written is generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Data address conversion (for example, see Patent Document 1) is executed.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used by the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Are programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233c in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1201 in FIG. 34) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  When the MPU 231 executes this remaining boot program, all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. The MPU 231 can read out a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. Expand the image drawn in the buffer. In addition, the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132 kilobytes) of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234. ) SRAM (Static RAM).

  Here, the MPU 231 sends an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 in accordance with the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred. ), Transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is transferred), and the start address of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  When the image controller 237 reads the data for one block from the predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, the read data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 stores the data. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during an unused period (a period during which no read operation or write operation is performed). The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  If the buffer RAM 237a is not provided and image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the reading speed is low. Therefore, while image data of a desired size is transferred, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 constituted by the 1-port type DRAM is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234 for one port. Time and other data access cannot be performed. During this time, the image controller 237a can read the image data from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 and draw the image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. The image display on the third symbol display device 81 may be delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type DRAM (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) is used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, one port is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in the image controller 237a is limited, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the buffer RAM 237a configured by SRAM capable of high speed operation is provided in the image controller 237, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The image display on the third symbol display device 81 is periodically performed at regular time intervals (in this embodiment, every 20 milliseconds), and the image controller 237 displays the third symbol display device. In accordance with the display timing of the image 81, the drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the access to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 needs to prioritize reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawing image data.

  Here, normally, the scanning area in a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 is set larger than the display region where the image is actually displayed, and the image is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. When displaying, while driving each pixel constituting the screen from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom on the scanning area set larger than the display area (so-called raster scan), Scanned. At this time, since the drawing image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period during which the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area is scanned (so-called blank period) The image controller 237 does not transfer drawing image data to the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is not read out and transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, since there is always a period in which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used during this blank period, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is as follows. By using the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period, it can be performed reliably.

  The resident video RAM 235 is composed of a DRAM having one input / output port (hereinafter referred to as “one-port type”), and image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is not overwritten during power-on. Used to keep it held. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. In the resident video RAM 235, among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the image displayed frequently, and the main control Data corresponding to an image to be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114 is transferred from the character ROM 234 and made resident.

  On the other hand, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is configured by a 1-port DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 236, when the image controller 237 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 in advance is displayed. This is for temporarily storing image data. The image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 237 is alternately stored in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c provided in the normal video RAM 236, and the image controller 237 displays the third design. The drawing image data stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c in accordance with the display timing of the display device 281 is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 so that the drawing image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. An image corresponding to the data is displayed.

  The resident video RAM 189 includes at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variation image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 164 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored. Hereinafter, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are collectively referred to as a power-on image.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1203 and S1204 in FIG. 34).

  Here, the power-on image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. The “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 12B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and when it is “out”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs drawing of main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. it can.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264, a power-on variation image area is displayed. A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 264 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 such as the third symbol or the character symbol. Here, with reference to FIG.13 and FIG.14, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. Is the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, FIG. 13B is the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 14 is the back C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The display control device 114 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. And the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, the rear image on the rear C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the player changes the stage to “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, a rear image shown in FIG. 14A is displayed as an initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 14C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 14C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back image shown to Fig.14 (a), and the back image of Fig.14 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 13A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. In general, games are often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to the partial region of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 14A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. The area (range) of the screen image stored in the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to the above area (range), and may be set as appropriate.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the back images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if this is done, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from the position a to the position a ′ or FIG. Since the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the image or the image between FIGS. 14A to 14B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234 is stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a has a low reading speed, it is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. It can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or the color tone with the passage. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 14A to 14B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 14 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 14 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 14 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 14B to 14C and FIGS. 14C to 14A is displayed as the normal video RAM 236 while the images in FIGS. 14A to 14B are displayed. 14 (a) to (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images in FIGS. 14B to 14C and FIGS. 14C to 14A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. it can.

  Note that on the back surface B and back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 11) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 435, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the occurrence of the vibration error by an error command. 114 is notified. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c while being alternately replaced.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a time counter. 233i, a stored image determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a main control. In addition to the effect based on the command from the device 110, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by the additional data table describing the display contents to be displayed with time and the display data table. This is an area in which transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The fixed display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. This is an effect displayed at 81. For example, when the stop symbol is an out symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  Further, the restart effect is a case where a confirmation command transmitted from main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the confirmed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set. In the variation display data table, a display pattern table for special variation that is set when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 in the sound lamp control device 113 is destroyed is also prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  The position information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Also good. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing an image of the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Is based on the position of the rear image displayed at the stage of being performed and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. To identify.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and image rendering based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table) according to the rear surface type. May be used to indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the third symbol display device 81), and the type information (for example, the position information) together with the back surface type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the display) is started may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. In the display data table, instead of directly defining the type of the third symbol, the offset information is defined because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the current time It is because it changes according to the stop design of the variation production performed. The difference between the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the symbol for stopping the variation effect performed one time ago as symbol offset information at each address until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change started. Is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the main controller 110 via the third lamp to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address as the symbol offset information at each address and the audio lamp controller 113. The difference from the stop symbol set according to the received stop type command (display stop type command) is described. As a result, the third symbol to be variably displayed in the fluctuating effect can be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 233g, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed as time elapses with respect to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It is a thing. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. This includes the concept of displaying another effect on the one effect, changing a part or all of the color tone of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  In the present embodiment, continuous notice displayed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. The case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, for example, the additional data table is prepared corresponding to the continuous notice effect that is additionally set with respect to the variable effect. The data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  In this additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. The sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 16).

  Note that “0000H”, which is the top address of the additional data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 16, “00FDH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the continuous notice command from the audio lamp control device 113, the additional data corresponding to the continuous notice mode (in this embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is displayed during the variable display) indicated by the continuous notice command. The table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The image contents to be drawn next are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the effect 1, effect 2, character 1 and character 2 sprites, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0001H”, the Null data is defined in the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”. When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified by the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 16, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233g indicates an address after “00FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thus, according to the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to the effect image (for example, the variable effect image), when displaying another effect image (for example, the continuous notice effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed is added. By setting in the data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are five types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be displayed additionally is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233e, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e. While updating the pointer 233g for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify each drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and from this one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. (Storage destination start address) is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Specifically, a drawing list (see FIG. 18) to be described later is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f And transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233g becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified by the address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It adds to the drawing list created based on it and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so that it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table can be set as desired. Can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at this timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1205 in FIG. 34). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S2115 in FIG. 46B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1401 in FIG. 36). When 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 36B) so that an image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) (See S1409). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 113 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S2001 in FIG. 46A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233g one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The additional data table buffer 233e is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to a performance (such as a continuous notice effect). As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. If there is an effect to be determined and added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. Based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233f. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while adding the pointer 233g one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233g is used to display the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d, additional data table buffer 233e, and transfer data table buffer 233f. This is for designating an address from which data transfer data information is to be obtained. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233g to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (S1403 in FIG. 36). The pointer update process (see S1709 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233g is updated, the MPU 231 reads the address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in the above, and a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the presentation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As illustrated in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table and other image contents. It is generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The drawing list includes transfer data information. This information is image data transfer instruction information to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. The transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the storage destination where the transfer target image data is to be stored. It includes information (information indicating whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and a head address (storage destination head address).

  For example, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). Transfer data information corresponding to the drawing list is generated from the storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination head address where the transfer target image data is to be stored, and added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. Data is read out and transferred to a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage destination head address) of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The time counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production time of effects displayed based on the display data table in accordance with the storage of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, a V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on a V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when an image drawing process and a display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 36). Each time the display setting process is executed, the time counter 233i is decremented by 1 (see S1711 in FIG. 42). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1202 in FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, all the image data of the sprite that is to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Then, the storage state corresponding to all the sprites in the unstored state is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data of the sprite to be transferred is Then, it is determined whether or not already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S2216 in FIG. 47). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S2217 in FIG. 47). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2302 in FIG. 48).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 36) is executed (see S2302 in FIG. 48).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 26. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 22), which is one of the fluctuation processes, are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big win state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S106). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop-type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, when reaching 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively), each is cleared to 0. Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second per-random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first entrance port. A start winning process associated with winning 64 is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64, and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. In order to pre-read the suspended counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the execution start timing of the variation effect, the first pre-read execution area 203d or the second pre-read execution area The process stored in 203e is executed.

  When executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (started winning) in the first entrance 64 (S201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the holding of the variable effect held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N of balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S202).

  Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operation reservation balls is not N <4 (S202: No) Return to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is set. 1 is added (S203), and the reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the reserved ball number command including the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) to the voice lamp control device 113. To the specified command transmission ring buffer. Thereby, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation-type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer, and are held in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the first to fourth areas, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the variation type counter storage corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a Each area is held (stored) in the area 203b4 (S205).

  Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the hold first area. Further, if the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “2”, each storage area of the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “3”, the retained third area If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “4” in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in each storage area of the retained fourth area.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b by the process of S205 are stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the order in which they are held. Shift to. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, the big hit lottery, the determination of the variation pattern, and the like are executed. As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203b are used for jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variation effect, determination of the variation pattern, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the process of S206 to S214 performed subsequent to the process of S205, the prefetch process for prefetching the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 suspended by the process of S205 is executed prior to the start timing of the execution of the changing effect. Therefore, these values are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S206). If it is off (S206: No), then whether or not the first prefetch processing flag 203f is on. Is discriminated (S207). Here, if the first prefetching processing flag 203f is off (S207: Yes), the prefetching processing execution is started even if the prefetching processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. It means that you are not waiting. Therefore, the first prefetching processing flag 203d is set to ON (S208), and the first per-random number counter storage area 203d1, the first per-type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter 203d3 in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and In the variation type counter storage area 203d4, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S209).

  Thereby, in main controller 110, in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, the first prefetching execution area is independent of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203d can be prefetched, and the results of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination can be predicted in advance. The prediction result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command.

  Further, by turning on the first prefetching processing flag 203f, it is possible to notify the first prefetching execution area 203d that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the 1 prefetch execution area 203d can be prefetched. Further, by maintaining the first prefetching processing flag 203f on until the prefetching process is completed, it is possible to prevent another counter value from being overwritten in the first prefetching execution area 203d.

  After the process of S209, the value of the reserved ball number command 203a (the number of reserved balls N) added by the process of S203 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S210). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S207 that the first prefetching processing flag 203f is on (S207: Yes), the prefetching processing is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. Is being executed, or waiting for the start of prefetch processing execution. Therefore, the processing of S208 to S210 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to S211. As a result, the values of various counters stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are maintained.

  In the processing of S211, it is determined whether or not the second prefetching processing flag 203g is on (S211). If the second prefetching processing flag 203g is off (S211: Yes), the prefetching processing execution wait is started even when the prefetching processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e. Means nothing. Therefore, the second prefetching processing flag 203e is set to ON (S212), the first per-random-number counter storage area 203e1, the first per-type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter 203e3, and the second prefetch execution area 203e. In the variation type counter storage area 203e4, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S213).

  Thereby, in main controller 110, in the prefetching process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process described later, the second prefetching execution area is independent of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203e can be prefetched to predict the result of the big hit lottery or variation pattern determination in advance. The prediction result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command.

  Further, by turning on the second prefetching processing flag 203g, it is possible to notify the second prefetching execution area 203e that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored. 2. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the prefetch execution area 203e can be prefetched. Further, by maintaining the second prefetching processing flag 203g on until the prefetching process is completed, overwriting of another counter value in the second prefetching execution area 203e can be suppressed.

  After the process of S213, the value of the reserved ball number command 203a (the number of held balls N) added by the process of S203 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e (S214). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S211 that the second prefetching processing flag 203g is on (S211: Yes), the second prefetching execution area 203e as well as the first prefetching execution area 203e is stored. This means that the pre-reading process is being executed by each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or waiting for the start of the pre-reading process. Therefore, the process of S212 to S214 is not executed and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Thereby, the values of the various counters stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are maintained. In this case, the pre-reading process is not executed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205 by the main start winning process.

  If it is determined as a result of the process of S206 that the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on (S206: Yes), the process of S207 to S214 is skipped and not executed, and the start winning process is terminated as it is. To return to the timer interrupt process. When the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on, as described above, the prefetching is performed again in order to prefetch the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are in a state before being stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, when the value of the predicted state fluctuation flag 203i is on, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again are set to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second by performing the processing of S207 to S214 unexecuted. Before storing in the prefetch execution area 203e, it is possible to prevent the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning from being stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, when the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON, the prefetching can be executed again reliably using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, according to the start winning process, the prefetching process is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetching execution area by the first prefetching process flag 203f and the second prefetching process flag 203g. It is determined whether it is being executed or is waiting for the start of prefetch processing execution. If the pre-reading process or the execution start standby is in progress, the corresponding pre-read execution area is overwritten with the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer at the start winning detection timing later. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 later has a prize (start prize) at the first entrance 64. Even in this case, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are continuously held until the prefetch process is completed. Therefore, the prefetching process can be reliably executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  When the first prefetching process flag 203f or the second prefetching process flag 203g is set to ON, the prefetching process (see FIGS. 25 and 26) repeatedly executed in the main process executed by the MPU 201 is performed. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-read execution areas corresponding to the pre-read processing flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected is pre-read, and the results of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted. . Then, based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, a prefetch command including information regarding the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. To do.

  In this way, at the start of the variation effect, instead of prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start prize detected after the start prize corresponding to the variation effect, In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) are temporarily stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Is stored in any of the above, and the prefetching process is executed in the main process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d or the second prefetching execution area 203e. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interruption processes that are executed with priority over the main process, such as the big win lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect. Run in.

  Here, as in the present embodiment, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, the look-ahead process for predicting the results of the jackpot lottery or the like by prefetching each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize When the pachinko machine is configured to execute the above, in the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning prize and each winning value one by one, but in the prefetching process, the prefetched value And individual hit values need to be compared one by one. As a result, the comparison process between the counter value and each winning value must be repeated as many times as the number of winning values in both the big winning lottery and the pre-reading process. In particular, when the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, for example, if the number of hits in the high probability state is 30, the above-described comparison process is repeated up to 30 times in each of the jackpot lottery and prefetch processes. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the big winning lottery and the prefetching processing.

  Under such circumstances, as in a conventional pachinko machine, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the changing effect at the start of the changing effect. In the game, the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the lookahead at the time of starting winning will be the most in the game. There is a risk of affecting the game, for example, the completion of the big hit lottery, which is an important process, is delayed.

  Further, in the timer interruption process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuating effect and executing a big win lottery, a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and a prefetch process is executed. In the case where the process is included, it may occur that the jackpot lottery process and the pre-reading process are performed together in one timer interruption process based on the determination of the start of the variation effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may take a long processing time, in this case, there is a situation in which all the processes included in the timer interrupt process are not completed until the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls necessary for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetch process is executed in the main process, while the big hit lottery performed at the start of the execution of the fluctuation effect is a process that is one process of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to execute in the start process (see FIG. 22). Thereby, even if the prefetch process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, since the prefetch process is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the prefetch process can be completed with certainty. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. In addition, while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Prefetch processing is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Here, when the pre-reading process is performed by directly reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b, the execution timing of the changing effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c or another reserved area. Thus, each time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prefetch process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the prefetch process. Even when the production start timing is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f or until the prefetch processing is completed. By setting the second pre-reading process flag 203g to on, even if a new start winning is detected during the pre-reading process, the counter acquired with the new start winning is obtained. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 can suppress overwriting of the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e during the prefetch process. Therefore, the prefetching process can be reliably executed.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203g are on, and the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. Are in the prefetch process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203b with the start winning are used in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area. Also not stored in 203e. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning. This is for the process of determining the destruction of the command sent to 113, and does not directly affect the game, so there is no problem.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two prefetch execution areas, the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained at the time of starting winning Is configured to store. Therefore, even if a new start winning is detected while each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during execution of the prefetch process is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the second prefetch execution area 203e is prefetched. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are executing the process are not stored, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with this new start winning are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Thus, the prefetching process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a set in which the pre-reading process is not executed among the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning prize and stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, and as many sets as possible On the other hand, the prefetch process can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e, the start winning is detected, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched. The value of the held ball number counter 203a at the time of being stored in the areas 203d and 203e (the value of the held ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5, 203e5. Stored in The prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the variable effect while the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the start process is executed, 1 is subtracted (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 21).

  Thus, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the hold counts of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, when the prefetch command is generated based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch processing, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is included in the prefetch command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received this prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of suspensions of the variation effect executed according to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, when setting the continuous notice effect based on the result of the prefetching process, the start prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process has been performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous notice effect with respect to the fluctuating effect for the previous or previous start winning. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command with respect to the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main controller 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetching has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the variation pattern command or stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the fluctuation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation process (S109) controls variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not is larger than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the held ball number) 1 is subtracted from the number N of balls (S305). This is because the number of reserved balls decreases by one because the execution of one variation effect among the variation effects that have been suspended is started by the variation start process (S311).

  Further, it is determined whether or not the first prefetch processing flag 203f is on (S306). If it is on (S306: Yes), the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d is stored. The prefetch hold count is decremented by 1 (S307), and the process proceeds to S308. On the other hand, if the first prefetch processing flag 203f is off (S306: No), the process of S307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S308.

  Further, in the processing of S308, it is determined whether or not the second prefetching processing flag 203g is on (S308). If it is on (S308: Yes), the prefetch hold count storage area of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetch hold count stored in 203e5 is decremented by 1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if the second prefetching processing flag 203g is off (S308: No), the process of S309 is skipped and the process proceeds to S310.

  As described above, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 corresponds to the execution start timing of the variable effect while the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Each time the change start process (S311) is executed, 1 is subtracted.

  Thus, the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the hold counts of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, by including the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 in the prefetch command, the audio lamp control device 113 that has received this prefetch command allows the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern obtained by the prefetch process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of fluctuating effects to be executed according to the judgment prediction result.

  Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, when setting the continuous notice effect based on the result of the prefetching process, the start prize that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process has been performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous notice effect with respect to the fluctuating effect for the previous or previous start winning. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 holds the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command with respect to the number of executions of the variation effect by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main controller 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetching has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the variation pattern command or stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  After the process of S309 or after a negative determination is made in the process of S308 (S308: No), the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S310). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted, such as area 203c, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area.

  After the data shift process of S310, the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S311), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S312). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S312: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S312: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S313 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S314). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S314: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S315), and it returns to a timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Although the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S314: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S316). The stop symbol is set in advance by a change start process (S311) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S310. Depending on the value of the value, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 2R positive variable big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S316, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. Then, in order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S317), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. Accordingly, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to display the stop symbol by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the change start process (S311) which is one process of the change process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S311). This variation start process (S311) performs lottery of “big hit” or “out” based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (big hit lottery) and the first symbol display device 37. And the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating effect performed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit lottery (win / no go decision) process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state, “7,307,582” is the winning value among the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1. (Winning value). Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”is the winning value (the winning value). In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these winning values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. .

  Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big win shown in FIG. Based on the type table, the display mode for the big hit is set (S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is set to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, which is the maximum number of rounds. It is determined whether it is a 15R probable jackpot that makes a transition, a 15R normal jackpot that makes a transition to a low probability state after a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or a 2R probable jackpot that makes a transition to a high probability state after a big round of two rounds Is done. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. The display mode at the time of big hit in the 3 symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7 (b), the jackpot type determined by the processing of S402 from the various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and 2R variations A to C, and the hold A variation pattern at the time of jackpot associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the sphere execution area 203c is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the subsequent processes of S404 to S411, whether or not the prefetching probability change flag 203h correctly indicates the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched. If it is determined that the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is not correct, a presumed gaming state is set, the pre-reading process currently being performed is interrupted, and the pre-reading process is performed before that. The process for invalidating the prediction result by the prefetching process is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined by the process of S402 is a probabilistic jackpot (S404). Here, if the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot variation jackpot. If it is a probable big hit (S404), it is next determined whether or not the prefetching probable flag 203h is off (S405). If the prefetching probability change flag 203h is not off, that is, if it is on (S405: No), the prediction is made when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetch target counter value in the prefetching probability change flag 203h. It is determined that the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is correctly predicted to be in a high probability state (probability variation state) based on the current jackpot lottery, and the process proceeds to S414 as it is.

  On the other hand, if the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off as a result of the processing in S405 (S405: Yes), the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetched counter value. It can be determined that the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is not correctly predicted based on the current jackpot lottery to be in a high probability state (probability variation state). Therefore, when the prefetching probability changing flag 203h is set to ON (S406) and prefetching processing is performed, the game that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched The state is set to a high probability state (probability variation state), and the process proceeds to S409.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing in S404 that the probability variation is not a big hit (S404: No), it is then determined whether or not the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is on (S407). If the prefetching probability change flag 203h is not on, that is, if it is off (S407: No), the prediction is performed when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetched counter value in the prefetching probability change flag 203h. It is determined that the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state based on the current jackpot lottery, and the process proceeds to S414.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S407, if the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on (S407: Yes), the prefetching probability change flag 203h is predicted when an actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each prefetch target counter value. It can be determined that the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is not correctly predicted based on the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF (S408), and the prefetching process is performed, the game that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value to be prefetched The state is set to a low probability state, and the process proceeds to S409.

  Here, originally, the setting of the prefetching probability variation flag 203h only needs to be performed based on the prediction result of the big hit lottery performed in the prefetching process. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prefetching process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the variation effects, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is only based on the prediction result of the big hit lottery performed in the prefetching process. If this setting is made, the prediction of the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be greatly shifted.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in addition to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed in the prefetching process, the value of the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set by considering the result of the original jackpot lottery by the processing of S404 to S408, and the original jackpot The gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the lottery is performed is predicted. As a result, even if the pre-read process is not executed for the counter values corresponding to all the changing effects, the game state prediction that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is higher. Can be done with precision.

  In the process of S409, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON (S409). Thereafter, the first prefetching processing flag 203f is set to OFF (S410), the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to OFF (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  As described above, when it is determined by the processes of S404 to S407 that the prefetching probability change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state (that is, when a positive determination is made in the process of S405 or the process of S407). ) Is a prediction result based on the pre-reading performed previously including the pre-reading that is currently performed may be predicted after erroneously assuming the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed It means that the nature is high. Therefore, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON, the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the prediction result based on the pre-reading performed previously including the pre-reading currently performed is performed when the original jackpot lottery is performed. In the prefetching process (see FIGS. 26 and 27) executed in the main process described later, the following process is executed.

  First, during the prefetching process, the MPU 201 sets the prediction state change flag 203i while prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. If it is determined that it is ON, the prefetching being executed is stopped (see S758: Yes, S768: Yes). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the prefetching from proceeding as it is based on the incorrect value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  In addition, the MPU 201 sets a predicted state change command (see S772 in FIG. 27), and transmits this predicted state change command to the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results obtained by the prefetch processing stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid.

  As described above, when it is determined by the processes of S404 to S407 that the prefetching probability change flag 203h indicates an incorrect prediction state (that is, when a positive determination is made in the process of S405 or the process of S407). ) Means that there is a high possibility that the prediction result based on pre-reading performed before that is predicted based on an erroneous gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed. To do. Therefore, the prediction state change command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and all the prediction results by the prefetch processing stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are invalidated, so that an incorrect prediction result is obtained. Based on this, it is possible to suppress various controls by prefetching. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and executes the continuous notice effect execution set at that time. Cancel the setting. As described above, when the pre-reading command is received, the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received pre-reading command is 15R probability variation jackpot or out of front and back. In addition, it is performed at a predetermined rate. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of the fluctuation change. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the predictive state change command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 is likely to have an incorrect prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command, and is thus set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be “15R probability variation jackpot” in the last variation effect, or even if it is missed, it will not be “rear out of reach”. . As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  Further, when the MPU 201 determines that the prediction state change flag 203i is on during the prefetching process, the pachinko machine 10 can use the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the correct state, the prefetching process is executed again (see FIG. 27). As a result, the correct value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d and the second prefetching execution area 203f, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on this, the pre-reading process is executed, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third mode is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As a stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detach, and complete detach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the off symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state excluding the short-time state, the short-off, long-off, based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table shown in FIG. Out of time associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from among various types of out-of-normal reach, out-of-super reach, and out-of-special reach Variation pattern is determined.

  Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the short reach, the out-of-length, the come-off normal reach based on the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table shown in FIG. Out-of-range fluctuations associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from among the various types, out-of-bounds super reach, and out-of-special reach types A pattern is determined. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S414, based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S413, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the fluctuation pattern type is set via the audio lamp control apparatus 113 (S414). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S412 is set via the audio lamp control device 113 (S415), and the process returns to the variation processing. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S611. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S708 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S612, S613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S613). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, an interrupt is permitted (S610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 27, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. First, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a prefetch process, a counter update process, and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process, first, a prefetch process is executed (S701). Here, the details of the prefetch process will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the prefetching process. This pre-reading process pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the detection of the start winning prize before referring to the big hit lottery performed at the start timing of execution of the variation effect, This is a process for predicting the result and the determination result of the variation pattern.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. In this prefetch process, first, it is determined whether or not the first prefetch process flag 203f is on (S751). As a result, if the first pre-reading flag 203f is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the start winning is detected in the start winning process (see FIG. 20). The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, which means that the first prefetch execution area 203d is on standby for execution of prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in this case, the processes of S752 to S760 are executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched. First, in the process of S752, the result of the big win lottery is predicted from the value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h and the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. To do. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the first prefetch execution area 203d matches the above-described winning value, and if it matches one of the winning values, it is predicted that it is a big hit. Moreover, when it does not correspond with all the winning values, it is predicted that it is out of place.

  The winning value is the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the changing effect) is performed based on the prefetched counter value indicated by the prefetching probability change flag 203h. It is set according to (mode). That is, it is predicted that the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is off and the normal low probability state is predicted. The winning value is set to “7,307,582”. On the other hand, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the prefetched counter value is predicted to be in a high probability state The hit value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656. 681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 ".

  In the process of S752, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is predicted to be a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first prefetch execution area 203d is further set. Prefetch and predict the result of jackpot type determination. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the first prefetch execution area 203d according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. .

  Further, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out of the range, the third symbol display device is further based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The stop type to be displayed in 81 is predicted from the front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, and complete outage. At this time, similarly to the process of S412 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22), it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. Depending on whether the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state or a high probability state, tables having different ranges of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type are set.

  Then, in the process of S752, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of disconnection are finally included as the prediction results of the jackpot lottery. The five patterns are classified into “15R probability variation jackpot” and “2R probability variation jackpot”.

  In the subsequent process of S753, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched to predict the variation pattern determination result (S753). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S752 is a jackpot, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, 2R based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. Corresponding to the prediction result of jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S752 among the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. Predict the fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S752 is out of place, the original big hit is based on the stop type predicted by the process of S752 (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, complete out). Depending on the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the lottery is performed, the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) shown in FIG. 7C or the variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) shown in FIG. 7D. Based on one of the tables, the variation pattern determination result is predicted. That is, if the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a low probability state in the normal state excluding the short-time state, it is for the out (normal) shown in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern table, stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d5 of the predicted stop type and the first prefetch execution area 203d from among the short deviation, the long deviation, the normal reach various, the deviant super reach various, and the deviant special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment associated with the changed fluctuation type counter CS1 is predicted.

  Further, when the gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, the deviation (probability change) variation shown in FIG. Based on the pattern table, it is stored in the predicted stop type and the variation type counter storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d from among the short-running, long-running, out-going normal reach types, out-going super reach types and out-going special reach types. The deviation variation pattern associated with the variation type counter CS1 is predicted.

  In the process of S753, finally, the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is classified into five patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, and “2R probability variation”. That is, when the predicted variation pattern is “out of short” or “out of long”, it is classified as “out”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various normal reach” or “various normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various types of super reach” or “various types of super reach”, it is classified as “super reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. When the predicted fluctuation pattern is “2R fluctuation A” to “2R fluctuation C”, it is classified as “2R fluctuation”.

  Note that, in the processing of S753, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on, it is predicted when an original big lottery (a jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variable effect) is performed based on the prefetched counter value. The gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is determined as a high probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off, the gaming state is determined as a low probability state for prediction. Set various tables to be used.

  In the subsequent processing of S754, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S752 is a probable variation jackpot (S754). Here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot. If it is a probable big hit (S754: Yes), the prefetching probable flag 203h is set to ON (S755), and the process proceeds to S758. Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S754 that the probability variation is not a big hit (S754: No), it is next determined whether or not the prediction result of the big win lottery in the processing in S752 is out of place (S756). If it is not off (S756: Yes), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, so the prefetch probability change flag 203h is set to off (S757), and the process proceeds to S758. Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. Further, when it is determined as a result of the processing in S756 that the image is out (S756: Yes), the processing proceeds to S758 as it is. Thereby, the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the process of S758, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the prefetching performed before including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. To do. In other words, when the process of S758 is executed, the prefetching performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d is performed when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that there is a high possibility that the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is erroneously recognized. Therefore, in this case, the prefetching currently being performed is stopped (S758: Yes), and the process proceeds to S772 (see FIG. 27). By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on an erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, and notification of the prediction result to the voice lamp control device 113 can be suppressed. The process of shifting to S772 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on may be determined at any time during the processing of S752 to S759 as well as the processing of S758. If the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S772. By performing the determination at any time, when prefetching is performed based on the incorrect value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding wastefully based on the erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S758, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S758: No), the process proceeds to the process of S759, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S752 And the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted by the processing of S753 and the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, FIG. Is set (S759). The prefetch command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and this prefetch command is the voice lamp control in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) to be executed next. Is transmitted to the device 113.

  In the process of S759, when the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set and the process of S760 is performed. Transition to processing. As described above, this prefetch process is performed regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the main process. Thereby, even if one prefetch process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds. Then, in the variation process (FIG. 21), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected, the pending 1 is held regardless of whether the prefetch process is being performed. The execution of the fluctuation effect is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the prefetching process, there may be a case where the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the prefetching process is completed.

  Here, when the execution timing of the change effect is detected, in the above-described change process, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of prefetch hold is executed (S306 to S309). Therefore, when the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetch pending count is 0 or a negative value Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the pre-reading process, the setting of the continuous notice effect that can be performed by pre-reading and the determination of the destruction of the command cannot be performed, so the pre-read command is transmitted to the voice lamp control unit 113. There is no need to do.

  Therefore, in the process of S759, if the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set and the process of S760 is performed. By shifting to the processing, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transmission of the prefetch command to the sound lamp control device 113, and wasteful communication is performed between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. Can be suppressed. In addition, since it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to process the result of the pre-reading process for those for which the fluctuating effect has already been started, it is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from being subjected to an excessive processing burden.

  Note that whether or not the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value is not limited to the process of S759, but of the processes of S752 to S759. It may be performed at any time. If the prefetch suspension count indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S760.

  When the processing of S759 is completed, the first prefetching processing flag 203f is then set to OFF (S760), and the counters C1 to C3 that are in the prefetching processing or waiting to start execution of the prefetching processing are stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. , CS1 indicates that the value is not stored, and the process proceeds to S761.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S751, when it is determined that the first prefetching processing flag 203f is not on, that is, is off (S751: No), execution of prefetching processing is started in the first prefetching execution area 203d. This means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are waiting are not stored. Therefore, the prefetch for the first prefetch execution area 203d in S752 to S760 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S761.

  In the processing of S761, it is determined whether or not the second prefetching processing flag 203g is on (S761). As a result, if the second pre-reading flag 203g is on (S761: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the start winning is detected in the start winning process (see FIG. 20). The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, which means that the second prefetch execution area 203e is on standby for execution of prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in this case, the processing of S762 to S770 is executed, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are prefetched. Among these, the process of S762 is the same as the process of S752, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second prefetch execution area 203e, the first per-type counter This is performed for the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the storage area 203e2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3.

  At this time, the hit value is also set based on the prefetching probability change flag 203h, as in the process of S752. That is, it is predicted that the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is off and the normal low probability state is predicted. The winning value is set to “7,307,582”. On the other hand, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the prefetched counter value is predicted to be in a high probability state The hit value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656. 681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 ".

  Also in the processing of S762, finally, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination including the prediction result of the jackpot type determination and the prediction result of the stop type determination at the time of losing includes “out-of-front”, “other out”, and “15R normal jackpot” "15R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot" are classified into five patterns.

  Further, the processing of S763 is the same as the processing of S753, the prediction result of jackpot lottery by the processing of S762, the prediction result of jackpot type determination, the prediction result of stop type determination at the time of losing, and the variation type counter storage area This is performed based on the value of the stop type counter CS1 stored in 203e5. At this time, similarly to the processing of S753, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on, the prediction is made when the original big winning lottery (the big winning lottery performed at the start timing of the changing effect) is performed based on the prefetched counter value. The gaming state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is determined as a high probability state, various tables used for prediction are set, and when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is off, the gaming state is determined as a low probability state. Set various tables used for prediction. Also in the processing of S763, finally, the fluctuation pattern determination prediction results are classified into five patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, and “2R probability change”.

  In the subsequent processes of S764 to S767, the same processes as S754 to S767 are executed based on the prediction result of the jackpot type obtained by the prefetching by the process of S762. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot type predicted by the processing of S762 is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (S764: Yes), the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is set to ON (S765), and the process proceeds to S768. . Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  If the jackpot type predicted by the process of S762 is another jackpot, that is, the 15R normal jackpot (S764: No and S766: No), the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to off (S767), and the process of S768 is performed. Migrate to Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. Further, if the jackpot type predicted by the process of S762 is out of place (S764: No and S766: Yes), the process directly proceeds to S768. Thereby, the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the process of S768, similarly to the process of S758, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S758). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the prefetching performed before including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. To do. That is, when the processing of S768 is executed, the prefetching performed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e is performed when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that there is a high possibility that the game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take is erroneously recognized. Therefore, in this case, as in the case of the process of S758, the prefetching currently being performed is stopped (S768: Yes), and the process proceeds to the process of S772 (see FIG. 27). By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on an erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, and notification of the prediction result to the voice lamp control device 113 can be suppressed.

  Note that whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on may be determined at any time during the processing of S762 to S769 as well as the processing of S768. If the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S772. By performing the determination at any time, when prefetching is performed based on the incorrect value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding wastefully based on the erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off as a result of the process of S768 (S768: No), the process proceeds to S769, and the process is predicted by the process of S762 as in the process of S759. The sound lamp control device shows the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the process of S763, and the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetch command shown in FIG. 8 to be notified to 113 is set (S769). The prefetch command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 as in the process of S759, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) to be executed next, This prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S769, as in the process of S759, when the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is set. Without moving to step S770. Whether or not the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value is not only determined in S769 but also in S762 to S769. It may be performed at any time. If the prefetch hold count indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S770.

  Thereafter, the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to off (S760), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are in the prefetching processing or waiting to start execution of the prefetching processing are stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e. The process proceeds to S771.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S761, if it is determined that the second prefetch processing flag 203g is not on, that is, is off (S761: No), execution of the prefetch process is started in the second prefetch execution area 203e. This means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are waiting are not stored. Therefore, the prefetch process for the second prefetch execution area 203e in S762 to S769 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S771.

  In the process of S771, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S771). This process is performed when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the process of S758 or S768, or during the first prefetch process flag 203f or the second prefetch process. In the situation where the flag 203g is not set to ON and the prefetching is not performed because the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are being prefetched are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. This is a process for detecting the case where the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON.

  If the predicted state change flag 203i is off (S771: No), the prefetch process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S771: Yes), there is a possibility that the prefetching performed previously including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. Therefore, the process proceeds to S772 (see FIG. 27), and the setting of the prediction state change command and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are first read-ahead. Processing to be stored in the execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the process after S772 in the prefetch process will be described. In the process of S772, the predicted state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S772). The predicted state change command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is executed next. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results obtained by the prefetch processing stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid. Thereby, it can suppress that various control by prefetching is performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 (see S1023 in FIG. 31), and executes the continuous notice effect execution set at that time. Cancel the setting. When the prediction state change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously received prefetch command is incorrect, so the continuous notice effect set based on the erroneous prefetch command is performed to the end. In the last variation effect, there is a possibility that the jackpot type does not become the “15R probability variation jackpot” that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or does not become the “front / rear miss reach” even if it is missed. As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  In the process of S771, if it is detected by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the process of S758 or S768 that the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON, in the process of S758 or S768, Since the prediction result based on the prefetch based on the gaming state that is highly likely to be erroneously set is set as the prefetch command, the prefetch that is highly likely to indicate the erroneous prediction result to the voice lamp control device 213 is set. A command will be sent. However, even if the prefetch command is transmitted, since the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S772 after the prefetch command, the prediction is performed later than the prefetch command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result. A state change command can be sent to the audio lamp controller 213. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 based on a prefetch command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result.

  In the subsequent processes of S773 to S783 after the process of S772, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is greater than 1 (S773).

  As a result, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is larger than 1 (S773: Yes), first, the reserved first (N-1) area (N is the number of held balls) provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter 203a value) is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d (S774). Then, the value of (N-1) is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S775). Further, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved Nth area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b is set to the second. The data is stored in the prefetch execution area 203e (S776), and then the value N is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e (S777). Then, the first prefetching processing flag 203f is turned on and the second prefetching processing flag 203g is turned on (S778), and the process proceeds to S779.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not larger than 1, that is, 0 or 1 (S733: No) as a result of the processing of S773, then the value of the held ball number counter 203a ( It is determined whether or not N) is 1 (S780). If the value is 1 (S780: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection stored in the hold first area provided in the hold ball storage area 203b. The values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d (S774), and then “1” is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S775). Then, the first prefetch processing flag is set to ON (S783), and the process proceeds to S779.

  As a result of the process of S780, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not 1, that is, 0 (S780: No), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are completely stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Since it means that it is not put on hold, the process directly proceeds to S779.

  As a result of the processing of S773 to S783, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 4, and the counter value corresponding to the four reserved balls is reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved third area Are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, and 3 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, during the first prefetch processing. While the flag 203f is set to ON, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the prefetch hold count storage area of the second prefetch execution area 203e 4 is stored in 203e5, and the second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 3, and the counter values corresponding to the three reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved second area are stored. The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 2 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved third area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, 3 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e, The second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 2, and the counter values corresponding to the two reserved balls are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area are stored. The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and 2 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The second prefetching processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  When the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 1, and the counter value corresponding to one reserved ball is reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the counters C1 to C1 stored in the reserved first area The values of C3 and CS1 are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d, 1 is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. In this case, nothing is stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the second prefetch processing flag 203g is kept off. Further, when the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a is 0, nothing is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f and the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203f. 2 The pre-reading flag 203g is kept off.

  As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b are transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch execution area corresponding to the transferred prefetch execution area. By setting the prefetching process flag 203f or the second prefetching process flag 203g to ON, the prefetching is performed again based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are transferred in the prefetching process to be executed next. Can do. Therefore, for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203f, the correct value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. Based on this, prefetching processing is executed, and the sound lamp control device 113 can be notified of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  Also, among the plurality of held balls held in the held ball storage area 203b, the most recently held ball and the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the held ball held immediately before the held ball are stored. Only the CS1 value is prefetched again. In this way, by limiting the target to be pre-read again to two reserved balls, it is possible to reduce the processing burden related to the pre-read again. Further, since the processing time related to the pre-reading can be shortened, when the start winning is detected, the pre-reading is performed again for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning. It is possible to minimize the situation where prefetching is not performed.

  In addition, since the pre-reading is performed again on the recently held ball, when the number of held balls is large, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the held ball that has been read-ahead again are stored. Based on the value, there is a time margin before the actual jackpot lottery is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the possibility that the prefetching will be completed again before the actual jackpot lottery is performed, it is possible to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of many jackpot lottery and prediction results of the variation pattern determination. Can be increased. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  In the process of S779, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to OFF (S779), the prefetch process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, after the prefetching is performed again by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 set in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 acquired with the start winning prize , CS1 can be stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203g can be set to ON, so that it is acquired with the start prize. Prefetching can be performed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, when the main prefetching process is executed by the MPU 201, the prefetching execution area (the first prefetching execution area 203d, the first prefetching execution area 203d, which corresponds to the first prefetching processing flag 203f or the second prefetching processing flag 203g set to ON). Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is prefetched from the second prefetch execution area 203e), and the results of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted. A prefetch command including information on the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, and the prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) are temporarily stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second In the main process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e after being stored in one of the prefetch execution areas 203e, This prefetching process is executed regardless of the time interval at which the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation start process (see FIG. 22), which is one of the timer interruption processes that are executed with priority over the main process, such as the big win lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect. Run in.

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, the prefetching is performed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the changing effect at the start of the changing effect. After processing, when the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect is performed, if the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the look-ahead at the start winning prize has been predicted, as described above, the game There is a risk that the game will be affected, for example, the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process in the game, is delayed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the prefetch process is executed in the prefetch process, the big hit lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is a process that is one process of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to execute in the start process (see FIG. 22). Thereby, even if the prefetch process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, since the prefetch process is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the prefetch process can be completed with certainty. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. In addition, while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In this prefetching process, the first prefetching processing flag 203f and the second prefetching processing flag 203g are referred to in one main process, and if both flags are on, the first prefetching execution area 203d. Referring to both the second prefetch execution area 203e, prefetch is executed for each. As a result, prefetching can be executed more quickly than when prefetching is executed by referring to only one of the prefetch execution storage areas in one prefetch process. Therefore, it is possible to perform prefetching with respect to more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original big hit lottery is performed.

  In the prefetch process in the present embodiment, the first prefetch process flag 203f is referred to first (S751), and if it is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched (S752 to S760), and then the second prefetching processing flag 203g is referred to (S761). If it is on (S761: Yes), the second prefetching execution area The case where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203e are prefetched has been described (S762 to S770), but before the actual prefetching (processing corresponding to S752 to S760 or S762 to S770) is executed The prefetch process in the on state is made after referring to both the first prefetch process flag 203f and the second prefetch process flag 203g. Each counter C1~C3 from prefetch execution area corresponding to the intermediate flag, and prefetching the values of CS1, may be a process corresponding to S752～S760.

  In this case, when it is determined that both the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203g are on, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are set. The prefetching and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e may be performed in parallel.

  For example, the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the first per random number counter storage area 203e1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. The winning random number counter C1 is read in advance, and then the process of reading the winning value of 1 from the ROM 202, and the read winning value is compared with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in each prefetch execution storage area. The process may be repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 in at least one prefetch execution storage area is a big hit.

  Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second prefetch execution area 203e are read in advance. Then, the process of reading the determination value for determining the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D, and the read determination value and the fluctuation type counter CS1 of each prefetch execution storage area. The process of comparing the value may be repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined with respect to the variation type counter CS1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas.

  Furthermore, in other prediction predictions based on prefetching, for example, prediction of jackpot type determination and prediction of stop type at the time of loss, the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetching are performed in the same manner as the variation pattern determination. At least one of a process of reading the corresponding counter value from the execution area 203e in advance and then reading the determination value and comparing the read determination value with the counter value of each pre-read execution storage area It may be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed for the counter value in the pre-read execution storage area.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to read the winning value or the judgment value separately for the prefetching with respect to the first prefetching execution area 203d and the prefetching with respect to the second prefetching execution area 203e, and to predict the judgment of the big hit lottery or the variation pattern. Therefore, the number of readings of the winning value and the judgment value can be reduced, and the prefetching process can be speeded up.

  In this case, for example, after the big hit for the first random number counter C1 of at least one prefetch execution storage area is determined, the first random number counter C1 of the remaining prefetch execution storage areas that are not determined to be big hits. Only for this, the prediction process of the jackpot lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, after the prediction of one determination is completed with respect to the counter value of at least one prefetch execution storage area, only for the counter values of the remaining prefetch execution storage areas where the prediction of determination has not been completed, The one determination prediction process may be continuously executed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment is completed is not compared with the winning value or the judgment value, so that waste of processing can be omitted and the prefetching process can be further speeded up. Can do.

  On the other hand, for example, even after it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one prefetch execution storage area is a big hit, the big hit lottery is performed for the first hit random number counter C1 of the two prefetch execution storage areas. You may make it perform a prediction process continuously. Similarly, after one determination prediction is completed for at least one of the prefetch execution storage area counter values, the one determination prediction process is performed on the two prefetch execution storage area counter values. It may be executed continuously. Thus, although there is a possibility that processing may be wasted, it is determined whether prediction of big hit lottery or prediction of prediction has been completed for any of the prefetch execution storage areas, and the prefetch execution storage area used for prediction is changed. Since processing is not necessary, processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity related to the control program due to the prefetching process.

  Further, the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are simultaneously performed. In the case of performing the setting, the value of the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set by first setting the prefetching probability variation flag based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d. After setting, the prefetching probability variation flag may be set based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e.

  At this time, based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the setting of the prefetch probability change flag 203h is changed from off to on, or from off to on. Or the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e performed simultaneously with the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. The value prefetching is performed based on the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h. Therefore, in such a case, based on the value of the newly set prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e is executed again. May be. Thereby, the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetching execution area 203d and the prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetching execution area 203e are simultaneously performed in parallel. Even in the case of performing the above, it is possible to correctly perform prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description of the main process will be continued. In the main process, when the pre-reading process in S701 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S702). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S702: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous look-ahead process (S703). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S703: Yes), the process proceeds to S701, and the prefetching process is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the previous prefetch process (S703: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next prefetch process. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S704, S705).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S704). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S108 (S705), and the process proceeds to S702.

  Here, since the execution time of the prefetch process of S701 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next prefetch process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the processing of S702, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S706 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S706), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S707). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S708), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S709), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S702 is executed at the timing when the prefetch process corresponding to the game state change performed in S701 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S704 and S705 performed within the remaining time. Yes. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, The process can be started from S701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetching process (S701) is executed as the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 has been described, but other processes are executed. You may comprise. For example, a prize ball counting signal, a payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), a large opening opening / closing process (S103), and a second symbol control process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the present embodiment. ) And the switch reading process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the prefetching process (S701) is not executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, but in the main process, the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 milliseconds should be executed It may be configured to execute the prefetch process. That is, after the negative determination is made in the processing of S703, the prefetching processing may be performed at any timing from the processing of S704, S705, and S702 to the return to the processing of S703. By executing the pre-reading process within the remaining period, in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in accordance with the detection of the start winning are determined in the first pre-read execution area 203d or the second It can be determined earlier in the main process that the data has been stored in the prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, since the prediction of the result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination by the prefetching process can be performed earlier, it is less likely that the actual lottery is performed first based on each counter value of the prefetching target during the prefetching process. can do.

  If the prefetch process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process that is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the process of S703 is omitted, and the processes of S701 to S705 are repeatedly executed. You may comprise. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but since the execution time of the look-ahead process changes according to the state of the game, the timer interrupt process in which the update process of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 is performed For the execution interval (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment), the time for repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is not constant and varies. Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the variation time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S918 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S915 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S918. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S918 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S802: No), this startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S918 is completed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S918, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S918, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S918 is executed (see S917 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S918 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process of S808. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S918 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S808 through S804 to S806 is performed. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process in S809 is that when the process from S804 to S808 is reached via the process in S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S901 was executed (S901). If the time has not elapsed (S901: No), the process proceeds to S912 without performing the processes in S902 to S911. In step S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S902 to S911 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S912 and the command determination process of S913 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S903 to S913 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S909 described later are set (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S905, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S906). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the number-of-holds counter 223a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is finished, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing vibration sensor input monitoring processing (S908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S952: Yes), it is determined that vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, and a setting is made so that an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226 (S953). An error command for notifying the controller 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error is set (S954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 31, the process which displays the error message image which alert | reports a vibration error on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S909), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. Also, when an alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 30) (see S953), an output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S912, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S913). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S913 is completed, update processing of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c and the single notice lottery counter 223d is then executed (S914). The continuous notice lottery counter 223c is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127 every time the update process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the single notice lottery counter 223d is updated one by one within the range of 0 to 14 every time the update process is performed, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 14). The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c and the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d updated by the update process of S914 are referred to by the variation display process (S912) executed in the next loop, and the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined. And is used to determine the execution of a single-shot notice effect.

  When the processing of S913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S915). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the process of S915 (S915: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption process flag are turned on (S917), and the power interruption process is executed (S918). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S919), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S915 (S915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S916: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S916: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S913). This command determination processing (S913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Also, in this process, when a prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the big hit lottery and fluctuation pattern determination prediction results indicated by the prefetch command are stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and the third symbol display device 81 The execution of the continuous notice effect by is determined. Further, this process is performed when the stop type command is received from the main controller 110, and when the command is determined to be destroyed or when it is recognized that the command is destroyed, the mode is changed to the special variation effect as the variation effect mode. Set the stop symbol to a special stop symbol. Details of the command determination process will be described below.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S1001). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1003). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) described later, the variation pattern for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1004). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special variation flag stored in the RAM 233 is on (S1005). This special variation flag is set to ON when the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch processing for the variation effect. Flag to be That is, the special variation flag is set to ON when it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command is destroyed. The comparison between the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the prediction result by the prefetch process is performed in the fluctuation display process (FIG. 33) by detecting the reception of the fluctuation pattern command by this command determination process (S1001: Yes). Is performed (see S1104).

  As a result of the determination in S1005, if the special variation flag is on (S1005: Yes), the special variation flag is set to off (S1006), and then the display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect as the variation pattern of the variation effect. In addition, a display stop type command indicating a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, and “1” in order from the left column) is received as a stop symbol of the variable effect. Setting is made regardless of the content of the stop type command (S1007), and the process returns to the main process.

  Each command set by the processing of S1007 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

  As a result of the determination in S1005, if the special variation flag is not on but off (S1005: No), then the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1008). If the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is on, the stop type extracted in the processing of S1008 is the big hit lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. It is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the table and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area match (S1009).

  For example, when the stop type extracted in the processing of S1008 is “reach other than front and back miss”, the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the pre-read information 0th area is “other miss”, and the variation pattern determination If the prediction result is “normal reach”, it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the stop type extracted in the processing of S1008 is “completely missed”, the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the pre-read information 0th area is “15R normal big hit” or the fluctuation pattern If the prediction result of the determination is “normal reach”, it is determined that they do not match.

  If the stop type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination as a result of the determination in S1009, it can be determined that the stop type command has not been destroyed, so the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is displayed. A display stop type command for notification to the control device 113 is set (S1011). In the process of S1009, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is OFF, the big hit lottery stored in the prefetch information 0th area and the prediction of the variation pattern determination are predicted. Since the result is invalid and the destruction of the command cannot be determined, the process proceeds to S1011 as it is, and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is set.

  The display stop type command set in the process of S1011 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. .

  After the process of S1011, it is then determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on (S1012). Although the details will be described later, the continuous notice execution flag is set to execute the continuous notice effect for the change effect started by the change pattern command in the change display process executed when the change pattern command is received. This flag is set to ON when the continuous notice execution counter value is greater than 1 or when the execution of the single notice effect is determined. If the continuous notice execution flag is off (S1012: No), the process directly returns to the main process. If the continuous notice execution flag is on (S1012: Yes), a continuous notice command is set (S1013), the continuous notice execution flag is set off (S1014), and the process returns to the main process.

  The continuous notice command set in the process of S1013 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

  As described above, when a variation pattern command is received, execution of a continuous notice effect is set for the variation effect started by the variation pattern command, or execution of a single notice effect is determined, the variation After receiving the stop type command that is paired with the pattern command, the “Jellyfish” image as the image of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is displayed as the third design against the change effect, unless the stop type command is destroyed. A continuous notice command to be displayed on the display device 81 is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, a “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the fluctuating effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is set.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1009, if the stop type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination (S1009: No), either or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed. After determining and setting the continuous notice execution flag to OFF (S1010), the process proceeds to S1007. Then, the display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect is set as the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the special stop symbols (for example, “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column as the stop symbols of the variation effect are set. Display stop type command indicating the symbol) is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command (S1007), and the process returns to the main process.

  Each command set by the processing of S1007 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the destruction determination of the command using the result of the prefetching process performed by the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the command is destroyed, the destruction determination is made. The variation effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command or the stop type command is switched to the special variation effect. As described above, this special variation effect is received until a confirmation command (a command for confirming and displaying a stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol fluctuating at high speed. Further, in the special variation effect, in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command, a special stop symbol (eg, symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114 to change the effect or stop symbol. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation after the variation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the confirmation display is made, even if the result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is out of place, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing the confirmation display effect of the jackpot.

  Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. In addition, by making the final display a special stop symbol, even if the final display is off, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state. The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the confirmation display being out of order, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the prefetching process.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the command is destroyed, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured not to transmit the continuous notice command to the display control device 114. Specifically, if the stop type command and the prefetch information 0th area information do not match and it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed, continuous notice execution Regardless of the state of the flag, the process corresponding to S1013, that is, the process of setting the continuous notice command is not executed, and the continuous notice execution flag is set to OFF. Although details will be described later, if the special variation flag is on, that is, the variation pattern command and the information stored in the prefetch information 0th area do not match, either or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command. When it is determined that the command is destroyed, the setting for executing the continuous notice effect or the setting for executing the single notice effect is not performed in the variable display process (see FIG. 33).

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the special variation effect executed when it is determined that the command is destroyed. If a “jellyfish” image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when a special variation effect is performed, the “jellyfish” image may be displayed in a special variation effect that is not normally displayed. Even if it is unclear what the gaming state will be given after the end of the special variation production, it may give the player an excessive expectation that it will be a big hit There is. And when it comes off as a result, a player may be disappointed and there is a possibility that the interest in a game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed in such a case, so that it is possible to go to the game without giving the player a big expectation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the execution setting of the continuous notice effect or the execution of the single notice effect is determined in the change display process executed when the change pattern command is received, the continuous notice command is immediately Instead of setting, a continuous notice command is set after receiving a stop type command paired with the variation pattern command. This is because, if it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the stop type command is destroyed as a result of the command destruction determination for the stop type command, the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect or the single This is to prevent the setting of the continuous notice command regardless of the decision to execute the notice effect.

  In this embodiment, it is configured not to set the continuous notice command when it is determined that the command is destroyed, but in addition to that, the currently set continuous notice effect is executed. You may make it clear all. For example, the process of setting the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1007 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If the continuous notice command is not set only for the fluctuating effects for which the destruction of the command is determined, a situation may occur in which the “Jellyfish” image is temporarily not displayed during the continuous notice effect, There is a possibility that a player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be questioned as to whether the big hit lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and all currently executed continuous notice effects are cleared, the “Jellyfish” image will not be temporarily displayed during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the stop type command match the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the pre-read information 0th area. If there is no match, it is determined that either or both of the variation pattern command or the stop type command and the prefetch command are destroyed, and the mode of the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect. In addition, the case where the stop symbol is set to the special stop symbol has been described, but in addition, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop category indicated by the stop category command. One or both of the fluctuation pattern command and stop type command Determine as being destroyed, it may be configured to switch the mode of variation effect special variation effect.

  For example, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is “out of short” and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “complete out”, it can be determined that they match. The variation pattern and stop type indicated by the pattern command and stop type command may be set as they are. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is “short out” and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “front / rear out of reach”, it can be determined that they do not match. Alternatively, it may be determined that either or both of the variation pattern command and the stop type command are destroyed and the variation effect mode is switched to the special variation effect.

  Whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command may be determined after, for example, an affirmative determination (S1009: Yes) is made in the processing of S1009. . If the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, the process may proceed to S1011. If not matched, the process may proceed to S1010.

  As a result of the process of S1004, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1004: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1015). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1015: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the held ball number command (that is, held by the main controller 110). The number of reserved balls of the variation effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1016).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The value of the held ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the held ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the held ball number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  In addition, after the process of S1016, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the held ball number counter 223a updated by the process of S1016 is set (S1017), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, a process is performed so that the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may display the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls.

  As a result of the processing of S1015, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1015: No), it is then determined whether or not a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1018). If it is determined that the prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes), the prefetch information included in the prefetch command in the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b (FIG. 9). In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the area corresponding to the number of holding times, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command and information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, respectively, In addition, the prefetch information valid flag of the area in which the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination are stored is set to ON (S1019).

  For example, if the prefetch hold count of the prefetch command is 4, the jackpot lottery prediction result indicated by the prefetch command is shown in the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information fourth area. Information and information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are stored, and the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to ON. Similarly, if the prefetch hold count of the prefetch command is any one of 1 to 3, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command is displayed in the prefetch information first to third areas corresponding to the prefetch hold count. The information indicating the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is stored, and the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information first to third areas in which the information is stored is set to ON.

  Here, since the number of prefetch hold included in the prefetch command accurately represents the number of suspensions of the variable effects that have been prefetched in the main control device 110, the prefetch information first to fourth through the processing of S1019. The prediction result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination can be reliably stored in the area corresponding to the number of suspensions of the variation effect that has been pre-read in the area. On the other hand, every time the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, in the variation display process (FIG. 33), the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are displayed. A process of shifting the included data to the pre-read information 0th to 3rd areas is executed. Thereby, in the pre-read information first to fourth areas, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effects each having the number of holding times of 1 to 4 can be always stored. In addition, information indicating prediction results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effect corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be stored in the pre-read information 0th area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, The variation pattern of the displayed variation effect is compared with the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the pre-read information 0th area, and they match. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed.

  After the processing of S1019, continuous notice determination processing is executed (S1020). Then, the process returns to the main process. In this continuous advance notice determination process, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process has been performed are triggered by the prefetch hold count indicated by the prefetching command and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetching process. It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for displaying the notice effect image continuously over the fluctuating effect for the start prize before or before the start prize.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the continuous notice determination process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031). If the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process. When the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 0, the continuous notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects at that time. In this state, if the execution of the continuous notice effect is newly determined, and the value corresponding to the number of variable effects for performing the newly determined continuous notice effect is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, the continuous notice previously set up until then is set. Following the effect, a newly set continuous notice effect is performed, and the continuous notice effect is continuously generated.

  Here, if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, for example, the last change effect in the first continuous notice effect becomes the front and back of the special reach, and the last change effect in the second continuous notice effect is normal reach. The player will have the following feelings if he falls off before and after. That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier. As a result, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be reduced.

  On the other hand, the process of S1031 is configured so that the subsequent process is skipped and the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined while the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 0 (S1031: No). It is possible to prevent the notice effect from being performed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of the continuous notice effect held by the player, which is caused by the continuous notice effect being performed.

  As a result of the processing of S1031, if the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0 (S1031: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held at that time. The process of S1042 is executed, and execution of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  First, in the process of S1032, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is extracted from the received prefetch command (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot (S1033). The jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as a table (S1034), and the process proceeds to S1037. Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted in the process of S1032 is not a 15R probability variable big hit (S1033: No), it is then determined whether or not the extracted prediction result of the jackpot lottery falls back and forth (S1035). As a result, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of front and back (S1035: Yes), the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected as the continuous notice determination table (S1036), and the process proceeds to S1037. Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted in the process of S1032 is neither 15R probability variation jackpot nor back and forth (S1035: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, only when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command is a 15R probability variation jackpot or out of front or back, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of fluctuation change. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as the continuous notice determination table used in the determination for the execution of the continuous notice effect, different consecutive notice determination tables are set depending on whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot or not. Thus, the probability (continuous notice determination probability) for determining execution of the continuous notice effect can be varied. In particular, according to the present embodiment, when the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 selected when the 15R probability variation big hit is compared with the outlier continuous notice determination table 222a2 selected when it is out of front and rear, The probability of continuous notice determination in the case of big hit is set to be the same as or higher than the probability of continuous notice determination in the case of out of front and back.

  Thus, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is suggested to the player that the game state is likely to be “15R probability change big hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. Since it can, it can give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the determination made when winning the ball to the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is more than the probability of “losing”. Is set to be small, so if the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out of front and rear”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. In this case, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 10, in both the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222 a 1 and the out of line continuous notice determination table 222 a 2, the probability of continuous notice determination increases as the value of the prefetch hold count increases. It is stipulated in. Here, the continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  If the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1033 to S1036, then the number of prefetching suspensions (that is, the number of suspensions of the variation effect in which the prefetching processing was performed in order to generate the prefetching commands) is determined from the received prefetching command. Extract (S1037). Then, the continuous notice determination range associated with the pre-reading hold number extracted in the process of S1037 is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table (the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222a1 or the off-time continuous notice determination table 222a2), By comparing the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice lottery counter 223c, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (S1038).

  Then, based on the determination of the continuous notice effect, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (S1039). Is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process. Thereby, since the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is maintained at 0, the process proceeds without setting the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, if execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as a result of the process of S1039 (S1039: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prefetch suspension count extracted in the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the prefetch hold count is not 1, that is, 2 or more (S1040: No), a value obtained by adding 1 to the prefetch hold count is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In this way, by setting the value obtained by adding one to the number of pre-reading suspensions (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, a change display process (described later with reference to FIG. 33) ( By S912), execution of the continuous notice effect is set for all the variable effects that have been put on hold before that, including the variable effect for which the prefetch process has been performed in order to generate the prefetch command.

  As a result of the processing in S1040, if the number of prefetching suspensions (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the single notice execution flag 223f is on. If it is determined (S1041) and the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is on (S1041: Yes), the value obtained by adding one to the number of prefetch hold (that is, “2” because the number of prefetch hold is 1) is continuously executed. The counter 223e is set (S1042), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1041, if the single notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, if it is off (S1041: No), the process of S1042 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is maintained at 0.

  Here, when the prefetch hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as it is, the fluctuation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the fluctuating effect in which the prefetch process is performed to generate the prefetch command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, there is a case where the “15R probability variation jackpot” is obtained after displaying the “jellyfish” image once, and the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has is diminished. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, when the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the one-shot notice effect is set in the variation effect that is started or executed at that time, or the last-executed variation effect. To do. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading hold count is 1, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and if the one-shot notice execution flag 223f at that time is on, the prefetch hold count is incremented by one. By setting the value in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, the “Jellyfish” image in the one-shot notice effect is displayed in the previous change effect among the two consecutive change effects, and in the subsequent notice effect in the subsequent change effect. A “jellyfish” image can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear as if the continuous notice effect is performed over two consecutive variable effects, and the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit of 15R probability change.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the number of reading suspension is 1, if the single notice execution flag 223f at that time is OFF, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is set to the continuous notice execution counter 223e as in this embodiment. By maintaining the value at 0, it is possible to prevent the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous notice effect from being displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has for the “jellyfish” image from diluting.

  In the present embodiment, in the continuous notice determination process, when the number of prefetch hold is 1, the case where execution of the continuous notice effect is set only when the single notice execution flag 223f is on has been described (S1040). -1042). On the other hand, even if the processing of S1040 and S1041 is omitted and the number of pre-reading suspensions is 1, regardless of the state of the single notice execution flag 223f, the continuous notice is based only on the lottery result of the continuous notice effect execution by S1038. Execution of production may be set. Further, when the prefetch suspension count is 1, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be set without fail.

  This often results in a “15R probability variation jackpot” after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, diluting the expectation of the player's continuous notice effect on the “jellyfish” image. On the other hand, when a player visually recognizes a “jellyfish” image that has not been displayed for a variation effect so far, with a certain variation effect, the player It is possible to have a strong expectation that is a 15R probability variation jackpot in the “jellyfish” image. Therefore, since various appearances can be held by the appearance of the “jellyfish” image, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 executes the pre-reading process prior to the timing when the execution of the variation effect is started based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning. Predict the lottery and variation pattern determination results. Then, the prediction result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command, and the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of the variation effects previously held from the prefetch hold count included in the prefetch command. From the jackpot lottery notified by the pre-read command, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for the pending variation effect. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be shifted based on the start winning, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various aspects of the continuous notice effect, execution conditions, and the like.

  In the case where it is configured to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of each variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the process of S1042 is performed. Then, the prefetch hold count may be set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as it is. Further, in the process of S1040, it may be determined whether or not the prefetch suspension count is two. In this case, since the “jellyfish” image is not displayed in the variation effect that is the trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect, the number of change effects that cause the continuous notice effect to be executed is one less than the number of pre-reading suspensions. Therefore, in this case as well, it can be said that what is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e is a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect. Further, in this case, determining whether or not the prefetch suspension count is 2 means that the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is executed is 1 as in the present embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description of the command determination process will be continued. As a result of the process of S1018, if it is determined that the prefetch command has not been received (S1018: No), it is then determined whether or not a predicted state change command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1021). If it is determined that the predicted state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), the prefetch information valid flags of all the prefetch information 0th area to fourth area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set to OFF. Then, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is set to 0 (S1023). Then, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, in the main control device 110, as described above, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state). If the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set in error, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is set to on, and each prefetch target counter is used when performing prefetching processing. The gaming state that can be assumed by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the value is set to a high probability state (probability variation state) (see S406 in FIG. 22).

  In addition, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to a low probability state, if the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is on, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is erroneously set. In the case where the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF and the prefetching process is performed, the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on each counter value of the prefetching target is performed. The possible gaming state is set to a low probability state (see S408 in FIG. 22).

  When the main control device 110 determines that the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set in error in this way, the main control device 110 transmits a predicted state change command to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device so far. The audio lamp control device 113 is notified that there is a high possibility that the prediction based on the prefetching indicated by the prefetching command received by 113 is based on the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h. Therefore, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, by setting off the prefetch information valid flags of all the prefetch information 0th area to fourth area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b. At that time, all prediction results by prefetching stored in the prefetching information storage area 223b can be invalidated.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to suppress various controls based on prefetching such as command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0, thereby canceling the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time. When the prediction state change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the previously received prefetch command is incorrect, so the continuous notice effect set based on the erroneous prefetch command is performed to the end. In the last variation effect, there is a possibility that the jackpot type does not become the “15R probability variation jackpot” that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or does not become the “front / rear miss reach” even if it is missed. As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing in S1021 that the predicted state change command has not been received (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed In step S1024, the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. Demo commands and confirmation commands received from the main controller 110 are set as display demonstration commands and display confirmation commands by the processing of S1024, and are temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the fluctuation display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation display process (S912).

  This variation display processing (S912) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to do this, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and a variation display process that is a process set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 is executed.

  Further, in the variation display process, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch for the variation effect indicated by the prefetch command. Based on the predicted result, the command destruction is determined. Details of the variable display process will be described below.

  Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated with the display of the fluctuating effect, and a display reserved ball number command is set and generated to notify the display controller 114 of the updated reserved ball number. If it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be performed for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display variation pattern command, it is continuously received after receiving the stop type command paired with the variation pattern command. Set the continuous notice execution flag to ON so as to set the notice command. In addition, the execution of the single notice effect is also determined in the variable display process in the variable effect, and if the execution of the single notice effect is decided, the same as the case where the decision to perform the continuous notice effect is made. The continuous notice execution flag is set to ON.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. End and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set. The contained data is shifted to the pre-read information 0th to 3rd areas, respectively (S1103).

  Specifically, first, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the first look-ahead information first area and the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information 0th area, the prefetch information The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information 0th area.

  When the data shift to the prefetch information 0th area is completed, the prefetch information first area becomes empty, and therefore information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the prefetch information second to fourth areas; , The information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag, respectively, the big hit lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the first to third areas of the prefetch information having a smaller area number, respectively. And by storing in the prefetch information valid flag, the data of the prefetch information second to fourth areas are shifted to the prefetch information first to third areas, respectively. Furthermore, the prefetch information fourth area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information fourth area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate this, the prefetch information valid flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF.

  When a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, it means that one variation effect on hold is started to be executed. Specifically, in the main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is stored. Based on the values of .about.C3 and CS1, determination of variation patterns and stop types in jackpot lottery and variation effects is performed.

  Therefore, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the shift process described above is executed between the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas of the pre-read information storage area 223b. In the pre-read information first to fourth areas, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effects each having the number of holding times of 1 to 4 can be stored. Information indicating prediction results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted for the variation effect corresponding to the received variation pattern command can be stored in the pre-read information 0th area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the process of S1103 executes the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b. In the subsequent processes in S1104 and S1105, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the jackpot lottery predicted by prefetching with respect to the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information 0th area, and It is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the main controller 110 has been destroyed by comparing the prediction result of the variation pattern determination and determining whether or not they match.

  In the process of S1104, the change pattern type in the change effect extracted from the change pattern command in the process of S1003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). If the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is on, the variation pattern type extracted in the processing of S1104 stores the big hit lottery prediction result of the prefetch information 0th area. It is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery prediction result stored in the area matches the prediction result of the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area (S1105).

  For example, when the variation pattern type extracted in the processing of S1104 is “various out of normal reach”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the pre-read information 0th area is “other out”, and the variation pattern determination If the prediction result is “normal reach”, it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type extracted in the processing of S1104 is “out of length”, the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the pre-read information 0th area is “15R normal big hit” or the fluctuation If the pattern determination prediction result is “normal reach”, it is determined that they do not match.

  If the variation pattern type matches the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination prediction result as a result of the determination in S1105, the variation for display for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the processing in S1104. A pattern command is set (S1106), and the process proceeds to S1108. In the process of S1105, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is off, the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 0th area and the prediction of the variation pattern determination are predicted. Since the result is invalid, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1106, sets a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104, and proceeds to the process of S1108. To do.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1106 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. . The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1105, if the variation pattern type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination (S1105: No), either or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Is determined, the special variation flag provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. Thereby, in the above-described command determination process (FIG. 31), when reception of the stop type command is detected (S1004: Yes), an affirmative determination is made by the process of S1005, and the special variation is used as the variation pattern of the variation effect. A display variation pattern command indicating an effect is set (S1007), and a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3”, “4”, and “1” in order from the left column) is used as a stop symbol of the variable effect. The displayed stop type command is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command.

  Therefore, a special variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device, and a special stop symbol indicating a special loss after the variation display is confirmed and displayed, so even if the result of the big hit lottery in the main controller 110 is out, Due to the destruction of the command, it is possible to prevent the jackpot confirmed display effect from being erroneously performed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue the game with peace of mind. In addition, by making the final display a special stop symbol, even if the final display is off, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state. The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the confirmation display being out of order, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the prefetching process.

  Note that, in this embodiment, when it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command is destroyed, as described later, the continuous notice effect is not set. However, in addition to that, the execution of the currently set continuous notice effect may be cleared. For example, the process of setting the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1107 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If the continuous notice command is not set only for the fluctuating effects for which the destruction of the command is determined, a situation may occur in which the “Jellyfish” image is temporarily not displayed during the continuous notice effect, There is a possibility that a player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be questioned as to whether the big hit lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and all currently executed continuous notice effects are cleared, the “Jellyfish” image will not be temporarily displayed during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the processing of S1108, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is set in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, as the reserved ball is consumed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the reserved ball is set). Is decremented by 1 (S1108), and a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated held ball number counter 223a is set (S1109). The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Then, the display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag is on (S1110), and if it is on (S1110: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111). If the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is 10 (S1111: Yes), execution of the single notice effect is determined, the single notice execution flag 223f is set to ON (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1114. . If the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is not 10, the single notice execution flag 223f is set to OFF (S1113), and the process proceeds to S1114.

  Since the single notice lottery counter 223d is a counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 14, the execution of the single notice effect is determined with a probability of 1/15 by the processing of S1111 to S1113, and the single notice execution flag 223f is set. Set to on. When the single notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, as described later, the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for the change effect that is set to start by the change display process, or this change effect is set. If the continuous notice effect is not performed in the fluctuating effect performed one before, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the one-off notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the fluctuating effect. Then, when the continuous advance notice execution flag is set to ON and then a stop type command is received, control is performed so that the continuous advance notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113.

  Next, in the process of S1114, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is greater than 1 (S1114). If the value is greater than 1 (S1114: Yes), the variation display process performs the variation effect. In order to set the execution of the continuous notice effect with respect to the changing effect for which the start process is being performed, the continuous notice execution flag is turned on (S1115). Thus, when a stop type command is received thereafter, control is performed so that a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113, and the “Jellyfish” image, which is an image of a single notice effect with respect to the variable effect, is displayed in the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e (S1116), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the variation display process, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is confirmed every time a variation pattern command is received, and if the value is larger than 1, the continuous notice continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113. And the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1.

  Here, in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, as described above, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, a value obtained by adding one to the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution determination. Is set. Therefore, since the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is performed while the value of the continuous notice counter 223e indicates a value of 2 to “number of prefetch hold + 1”, the continuous notice effect is provided over the fluctuating effect corresponding to the number of prefetch hold. Will be done. Therefore, the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed for all the previously produced variable effects, including the variable effect that has been pre-read to generate the prefetch command that triggers the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

  If the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is 1 or less as a result of the process of S1114 (S1114: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is 1 (S1117). If the value is 1 (S1117: Yes), the process of S1115 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1116, the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1116), and the process returns to the main process. Accordingly, if the value of the continuous notice counter 223e is 1, even if the single notice execution flag 223f is set to ON, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. Subtract 1

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision (that is, the variable effect that causes the continuous notice effect to be executed). The number is not set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e. Then, each time a variation pattern command which is an instruction to start a variation effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. If the value is larger than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. The continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed at the same time, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. 1 is subtracted from the value of.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the continuous notice execution counter is set to the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice execution counter is set to 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is larger, the continuous notice effect is performed over the variable effects for the first set number of times by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice execution counter while performing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. When configured in this way, after one continuous notice effect is completed, the continuous notice effect may start again, that is, the continuous notice effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variation effect in the first continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and if the last variation effect in the subsequent second continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player You will have a feeling of That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variation effect in the first continuous notification effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that the single notification effect is performed in the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed and lost once as a result of the first continuous notice effect will continue the game with the assumption that the continuous notice effect will continue by looking at the display of the single notice effect. Although there is a possibility, since the image for the continuous notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's intention will be betrayed as a result. In this way, by configuring as described above, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be lowered as a result.

  Further, the conventional pachinko machine may cause the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start prize (entering the first entrance slot 64) is generated during the variation effect and the variation effect associated with the start prize is suspended. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, 1 is added to the number of prefetch suspensions (that is, the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision. A value is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to every time a change pattern command which is an instruction to start a change effect is received. "A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice command is issued. After the continuous notice effect is performed by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e without transmitting, it is always in one fluctuation effect. Jellyfish "image can be prevented from being displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous notice effect is finished, it can be suppressed that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously generated, It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player holds.

  In addition, after completion of the continuous notice effect, by setting the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect according to the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect, the operation is started. Even if the image of the continuous notice effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  As a result of the processing in S1117, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not 1 (S1117), it means that the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e at that time is 0. Accordingly, it is next determined whether or not the single notice execution flag 223f is on (S1118). If it is on (S1118: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag is set to on (S1119), and the main process is performed. Returning, if the single notice execution flag 223f is not on, that is, if it is off (S1118: No), the process of S1119 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  Thereby, even if the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not made, it is possible to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 in one shot for one variation effect. Here, when attention is paid to one variation effect, in both the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect, the “jellyfish” image matches the change effect in that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when a “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “jellyfish” image displayed in the continuous notice effect is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while considering whether it is a “image” or a “jellyfish” image displayed in a single notice effect. When the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next variation effect, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. .

  The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the single notice effect is the same “jellyfish” image as the continuous notice effect. Therefore, since it is sufficient to instruct the display control device 114 to display the “jellyfish” image with respect to the fluctuating effect without distinguishing between the single notice effect and the continuous notice effect, the single notice effect is set. In both cases, the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON in the variation display process even when the continuous notice effect is set. Thereby, after the continuous notice execution flag is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are not limited to the execution of the single notice effect or the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect. In the same processing flow, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variation effect. Therefore, simplification of the program in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be achieved.

  Here, in this embodiment, the execution of the single notice effect is determined every time the change pattern command is received, but instead, the execution of the single notice effect is determined every time the prefetch command is received. You may comprise as follows. For example, in the command determination process (FIG. 31), when it is determined that a prefetch command is received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is 10, for example, the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command The execution of the single notice effect may be set with respect to the fluctuating effect for which the is performed. In this case, each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is provided with a single notice execution flag indicating that the single notice effect is executed when it is on. When this single-shot notice execution flag is set to OFF as an initial value and execution of a single-shot notice effect is set, the single-shot of the area corresponding to the number of pre-read commands held pre-read among the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas is set. Set the notice execution flag to on. Then, in the variable display process, the shift process is executed between the pre-read information 0th area and the fourth area including the single notice execution flag by the process of S1103, and the single notice of the pre-read information 0 area is performed in S1118. It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. Also, the process of S1041 of the continuous notice determination process (FIG. 32) also determines whether or not the single notice execution flag of the prefetch information 0th area is on. Note that in the shift process of S1103, the one-shot notice execution flag of the pre-read information fourth area that has become empty is set to OFF. In this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variable display processing can be omitted.

  In this way, by determining the execution of the single notice effect every time a prefetch command is received, the single notice of the pending variable effect is determined in the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect that is performed every time the prefetch command is received. It is possible to consider whether or not performance execution is set. For example, when the execution of the single notice effect is set for the pending change effect, it can be determined that the execution setting of the continuous notice effect is not performed. If such a determination is made, the one-shot notice effect is more easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, this is due to the one-shot notice effect. It is possible to make the player think more strongly whether it is a thing due to a continuous notice effect or not. In this way, in the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect performed every time the prefetch command is received, more consideration is made by considering whether or not the execution of the single notice effect is set for the pending change effect. Since the execution of the production can be determined in consideration of the conditions, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1201), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up. Here, the boot process (S1201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) as in a conventional gaming machine. Instead, it is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1211.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1212, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1212, the instruction is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1201 in FIG. 34). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1202 of FIG. 34) (S1215), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1212. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. Processing for setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1213 to S1215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. Processing for setting the head address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1211. And after repeating several times including the process of S1212, you may make it perform the process of S1213-S1215.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1213 to S1215 without performing the processes of S1211 and S1212. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1202). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 sends image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power-on main image area 235a is started. Transfer to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1203, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1204). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The leading address of the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on is included. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1204, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1205). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 46A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 434 so as to transfer is executed (see S2002 in FIG. 46A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is kept on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 12 is drawn. Determination processing (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and simple display setting processing (see S1409 in FIG. 36B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 has been received, that is, when a display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the player can easily confirm the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning with the simple variation effect. it can.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes time to transfer the data, and after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1205, interrupt permission is set (S1206). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1206, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 36B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S1401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1402), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a display data table for demonstration or a display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If a continuous notice command is stored, an additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a change effect, there is a high possibility that a display change pattern command, a stop type command, a continuous notice command, etc. will be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. . Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and the aspect of the continuous notice effect are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the aspect The image drawing can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1403), in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S1402) or the like. Next, the contents of an image for one frame to be displayed are specifically specified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S1404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1403) or the simple display setting process (S1409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S1405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. A transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set. Further, when the simple image display flag 233b is OFF and the continuous notice command or the rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice image used for the continuous notice effect is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the simple image display flag is on (S1401: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S1408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S1409) is executed, and the process of S1404 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, details of the above-described command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S1501: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1502), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S1503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S1504). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S1504: Yes), the held ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S1505), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S1505) will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S1601). The display reserve series command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the display hold ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the number of reserved balls included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S1602). In the processing of S1602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the held ball number information is acquired from the last stored display ball number command. Thereby, the newest number of reserved balls can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S1602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to other numbers of reserved balls are turned off. (S1603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of held balls corresponding to the number determined flag set to ON is set to the third number by referring to the number determined flag. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1504 that there is no display pending ball number command (S1504: No), then it is determined whether there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S1506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1507), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38B, details of the confirmation command process (S1507) will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S1507), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2611), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the display confirmation command is received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variation effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S1506 (S1506: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S1508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1509), and the process returns to S1501.

  Details of the demo command process (S1509) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demo command process (S1509), first, a display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1621). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233e to clear the contents, and the Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear the contents (S1622).

  In the demonstration display data table, since it is not necessary to newly transfer image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, writing null data to the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1622 indicates that there is no transfer target image data to be transferred while the image is drawn by the demonstration display data table. it can.

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233i (S1623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1624). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S1625), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S1624, from the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S1621. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified in the display data table for demonstration is measured using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S1623, and the process of S1625 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, if it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the time of the display setting control time counter 233i, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Also, when the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S1509) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S1625.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the changing effect after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed. In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1508 that there is no display demo command (S1508: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S1510: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S1511), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S1511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S1631). If the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is a special variation effect, the special variation effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S1631, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S1631 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S1632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e (S1633).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1631, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233i (S1634). . Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1635), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S16376).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the varying effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command process (S1511) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S1625.

  When the process of S1636 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S1637), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the processing in S1635, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S1631. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Also, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1632, and the sprite necessary for the set change display data table is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data is previously transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233i in which the variation time data is set by the processing of S1635, the variation effect time defined in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S1637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S1631. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S1511: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1513), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, details of the stop type command process (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out, reach other than front / rear reach, complete out, or special stop symbol ) Is determined (S1641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S1642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S1643), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S1642 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S1404) described above, the stop symbol set by the process of S1642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S1643 after the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is started, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S1641, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S1642. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S1512 (S1512: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command in the unprocessed commands ( If there is a continuous notice command (S1514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S1515), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40A, details of the continuous notice command processing (S1515) will be described. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing continuous notice command processing. This continuous notice command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the continuous notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the continuous notice command processing, first, a new continuous notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S1405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1651). Next, the additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type (in this embodiment, “jellyfish” image) indicated by the continuous notice command is determined, and the determined additional data table for continuous notice is stored in the data table. Read from the area 233b and set it in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the continuous notice corresponding to the additional data table for continuous notice stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S1652 is processed. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

  After that, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type (“jellyfish” image) included in the continuous notice command is turned on among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each successive notice image type, and other successive notices are turned on. The continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to OFF (S1653), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set in the process of S1651 is turned on, a predetermined continuous notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the continuous notice command process. The continuous notice type corresponding to the additional data table for continuous notice set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the processing of S1653. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer image data necessary to display the specified continuous notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in the processing of S1514 that there is no continuous notice command (S1514: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S1516). ), If there is a back image change command (S1516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S1517), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40B, details of the rear image change command processing (S1517) will be described. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S1405) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S1661). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S1662), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S1661 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S1662. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S1662, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. When there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands change due to noise and other commands, and another command is mistakenly interpreted as a back image change command. There is also the danger of being done. In the processing of S1662, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in step S1516 that there is no rear image change command (S1516: No), it is then determined whether there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S1518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S1519), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the frame button operation command process (S1519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command process. This frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button operation command, a frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S1671), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S1671, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 according to the display data table for change. Is detected, the process of updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select a favorite super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in step S1518 that there is no frame button operation command (S1518: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S1520). If there is an error command (S1520: Yes), the error command process is executed (S1521), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S1521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S1681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S1682). Return to processing.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S1681, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S1682 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S1682, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S1520 (S1520: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S1522), and the processing returns to S1501.

  In the processing of S1501 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes). ), The processing of S1502 to S1522 is executed again. Then, the processing of S1501 to S1522 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S1501 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the simple command determination process (S1408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display table confirmation command, a display variation pattern Only commands and display stop type commands are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command is confirmed command processing (see FIG. 38 (b)), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39 (a)), and stop type. Command processing (see FIG. 39B) is executed, and for other commands, processing for discarding is performed without executing processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S1631. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S1632, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45, the details of the above-described display setting process (S1403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1701). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S1701: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S1702 to S1708 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S1702), and then S1703 to S1708. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the processing of S1703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is on (S1703). If the new reserved ball number command flag is on (S1703: Yes), display is performed in the previous command determination processing. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S1704).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S1751). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S1751, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S1752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, after the hold image setting process (S1704) or in the process of S1703, if it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S1703: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S1705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S1705: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S1706).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. In order to display the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81, the warning image data is developed (S1761).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S1761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S1762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, after the warning image setting process (S1706) or in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S1705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S1707). If the frame button operation flag is on (S1707: Yes), frame button operation processing is executed (S1708).

  Here, the details of the frame button operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation process. This process is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen for selecting the super reach display mode is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and displays the super reach to be displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting an aspect.

  In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S1771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and based on the set variation display data table, the previously executed V In the interrupt process, when the image controller 237 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1772 that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S1772 that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each super reach display mode is set. Update (S1773) and return to the display setting process. To update the super reach type, only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are turned off so that a plurality of super reach display modes are selected in a predetermined order. Set to.

  In this embodiment, when specifying the super reach display of the mode selected by the player in the display data table for change, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is specified for each address. Yes. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S1710 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach display mode in which the super reach type flag is turned on are extracted. Thereby, in the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) corresponding to the selected super reach display mode is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are necessary for each sprite. Since various parameters are set, the super-reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 42, after the frame button operation processing (S1708) or in the processing of S1707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, is off (S1707: No), then S1709. Move on to processing.

  In S1709, pointer update processing is executed (S1709). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by using the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f. This is a process for updating the pointer 233g that designates the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data is to be obtained.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S1781). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233g is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233g by the processing of S1781, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information. Is discriminated (S1782). As a result, if it is End information (S1782: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233g has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S1783), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1783: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S1784), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counter 233i (S1785), and the process proceeds to S1787. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1783, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S1783: No), the pointer 233g The value is subtracted by 1 (S1786), and the process proceeds to S1787. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the process of S1782, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, when it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g by the process of S1781 is not the End information (S1782: No) ), The process of S1783 to S1786 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1787.

  In the process of S1787, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S1787). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S1787: No), the pointer update process is terminated and display setting is completed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1787: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233g is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S1788), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S1789) to return to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 42, after the pointer update processing, the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update processing from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing contents are expanded (S1710). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S1710 together with the hold image and warning image previously expanded, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233i (S1711), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1712). If the value of the time counter 233i is 1 or more (S1712: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233i is 0 or less (S1712: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S1713, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S1713).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1713: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. The mode of the determined display effect corresponding to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the determined display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set. Each Null data is written and the contents are cleared (S1714). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233i (S1715), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1716). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S1717), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1718), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S1719), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233d or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S1719 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S1404), the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S1719 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1713, if the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S1713: No), the process proceeds to S1720 shown in FIG. 43, and it is determined whether or not the confirmed display flag is on (S1720). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1720: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S1721), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1722), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S1723). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1724), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1725), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S1720: Yes is satisfied when a definitive display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are determined by the processing of S1714. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the processing of S1722, the clear processing of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1720, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S1720: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S1726). If the demonstration display flag is on (S1726: Yes), the determination result in S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and V Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1726, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S1726: No), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the variation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the change effect, the display data table for change corresponding to the change effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1727), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S1728).

  If the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S1728: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S1728: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set to Null data. Is written and the contents are cleared (S1729). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S1730), the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1731), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated, so that the player uses the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  When the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S1714 shown in FIG. 42 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233d. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  Further, when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1631 in FIG. 39A is performed, and the display data is displayed. A variation display data table is set in the table buffer 233d, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1621 in FIG. 38C is performed, and the display data table is displayed. A demonstration display data table is set in the buffer 233d, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received is not received even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in this case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the simple display setting process (S1409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, It was specified that one of the images (figure 12 (b) and (c)) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time is stopped and displayed. Processing for setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. In addition, after the presentation time of the fluctuating effect by the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is not originally received. In the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table that specifies that the variation effect of the variation image at power-on is restarted is performed.

  Next, details of the transfer setting process (S1405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S2002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S2001, that is, if it is off (S2001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S1603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the image data from the character ROM 234 is transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S2002), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S2002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S2111), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S2111: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S2112). In the process of S2112, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S2112 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2112: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2112: Yes), the process proceeds to S2113. Also, as a result of the process of S2111, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2111: No), the process proceeds to S2113.

  In the processing of S2113, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2113). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S2114), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the top address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, and transfer destination information (storage destination information. In this case. , The resident video RAM 235), and the start address (storage destination start address) of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data transferred here is to be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S2115), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 36B) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 in FIG. 36B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 42 to 45) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S2001: No in FIG. 46A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S2003), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S2003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update process (S1709) of the display setting process (S1403) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S2201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2202). If it is transfer data information (S2202: Yes), transfer target image data (sprite to start transfer) is determined from the transfer data information. ) Of the character ROM 234 in which the image data is stored is extracted, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) and the work RAM 233 are extracted. (S2203). Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2205, after the image data transfer in the image controller 237 is completed, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 (S2205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S2205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S2206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2206: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. Also, as a result of the process of S2205, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2205: No), the process proceeds to S2207.

  In the process of S2207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2207). If the transfer start flag is on (S2207: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag (S2208), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2207: No), it is then determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S2209).

  If the new continuous notice command flag is on (S2209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the additional data table for continuous notice for the continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733e. Therefore, after the new continuous notice command flag is set to OFF (S2210), the head address (storage start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the continuous notice image corresponding to the continuous notice determination flag in the ON state. And the final address (storage source final address) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2211), and the sprite image data indicated by the specified information is used as the transfer target image. The process proceeds to S2216.

  In the processing of S2209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (S2209: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S2212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S2212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S2212: Yes), this means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S2213), the back image provided for each back image type Of the determination flags, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state, and transfer The head address of the previous (ordinary video RAM 236) is specified (S2214), and the sprite image data indicated by the specified various pieces of information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S2214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S2216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216). The determination in the processing of S2216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If it is determined that the image is stored and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S2216 (S2216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image is set (S2217). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (storage destination information, in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination. The start address (storage destination start address) of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image transferred here is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the normal video RAM 236. To the designated address of the normal video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S2217, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated (S2218), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on” and storing it in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprite to be set to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command is handled. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous preview image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to transfer the image data to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the transfer data table pointer 233g set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the target image transfer instruction is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The image of each sprite specified in the data table can be immediately drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the above-described drawing process (S1406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S2301). That is, in the process of S2301, the storage RAM type and address for storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1404). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. In addition, a final address (storage source final address), storage destination information (information indicating whether the video RAM 235 is resident or the normal video RAM 236) where the transfer target image data is to be stored, and a head address (storage destination address) are additionally written. .

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S2302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ), And storage destination information (information indicating whether the video RAM 235 is resident or the normal video RAM 236) and the start address (storage destination start address) in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are extracted and stored from the storage source start address. When the image data stored up to the original final address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information is in an unused state. As a guide, it is stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Image data sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the storage destination head address of the resident video RAM235 or normal video RAM236 indicated by the storage destination information. The image data stored here is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S2302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S2303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 36) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are alternately set to the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds. By designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the fluctuating effect, prefetching each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize, A look-ahead process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery is executed. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the prefetching process in the main process, and to execute a big hit lottery or the like in a timer interruption process that is executed with priority over the main process. .

  Here, when the pachinko machine is configured to execute the pre-reading process separately from the jackpot lottery, it is necessary for the jackpot lottery to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning prize and each winning value one by one. On the other hand, in the prefetching process, it is necessary to compare the prefetched value and each winning value one by one separately from the jackpot lottery. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big win lottery and the prefetch process, for example, the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the big winning lottery and the prefetching processing.

  Under such circumstances, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winnings detected after the start winnings corresponding to the changing effects at the start of the changing effects as in the conventional gaming machine. If the pre-reading process is used, prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be performed, in parallel with the fact that the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed. There is a risk of affecting the game, for example, the completion of the big hit lottery, which is an important process, is delayed.

  Further, in the timer interruption process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuating effect and executing a big win lottery, a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and a prefetch process is executed. In the case where the process is included, it may occur that the jackpot lottery process and the pre-reading process are performed together in one timer interruption process based on the determination of the start of the variation effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may take a long processing time, in this case, there is a situation in which all the processes included in the timer interrupt process are not completed until the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls necessary for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the prefetching process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery is executed in the timer interrupt process so that the prefetching process is executed in the main process. Even during the event, the timer interruption process is executed with priority, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the start timing of execution of the variation effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be reliably completed because it is executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-fetch process is executed using the value of each counter acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the big win lottery or the like is predicted, and the big hit lottery Can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, so that the game can be normally controlled.

  In the first embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained at the time of starting winning are stored not only in the reserved ball number storage area 203b but also in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. The prefetch processing is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, when the pre-reading process is performed by directly reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball number storage area 203b, the execution timing of the changing effect is reached during the pre-reading process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c or another reserved area. Thus, each time the change start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, it is necessary to change the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the prefetch process is executed using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the prefetch process. Even when the production start timing is reached and the variation start process is executed, the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage area of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetch process. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision (that is, the number of variable effects that cause the continuous notice effect to be executed). ) Is not set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e as it is, but a value obtained by adding 1 to the pre-reading hold count (the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e. Then, each time a variation pattern command which is an instruction to start a variation effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. If the value is larger than 1, a “jellyfish” image is displayed for the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. The continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed at the same time, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is transmitted without transmitting the continuous notice command. 1 is subtracted from the value of. Further, while the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is 0, the continuous notice command is not transmitted except when the execution of the single notice effect is determined, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is also held at 0. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the continuous notice execution counter is set to the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice execution counter is set to 0 when the variable effect is executed. If it is larger, the continuous notice effect is performed over the variable effects for the first set number of times by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice execution counter while performing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect. When configured in this way, after one continuous notice effect is completed, the continuous notice effect may start again, that is, the continuous notice effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variation effect in the first continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and if the last variation effect in the subsequent second continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player You will have a feeling of That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variation effect in the first continuous notification effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that the single notification effect is performed in the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed and lost once as a result of the first continuous notice effect will continue the game with the assumption that the continuous notice effect will continue by looking at the display of the single notice effect. Although there is a possibility, since the image for the continuous notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's intention will be betrayed as a result. In this way, by configuring as described above, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be lowered as a result.

  Further, the conventional pachinko machine may cause the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start prize (entering the first entrance slot 64) is generated during the variation effect and the variation effect associated with the start prize is suspended. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as in the first embodiment, the number of prefetch suspensions included in the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision (that is, the continuous notice effect is executed). The value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to every time a change pattern command as a start instruction of the change effect is received. If it is larger, a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that a “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the variation effect, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If it is 1, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is subtracted by 1 without sending the continuous notice command, and after the continuous notice effect is performed, it is necessary. It can be made to the image of the continuous announcement attraction and single announcement attraction in one variation effect ( "jellyfish" images) are not displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, after the continuous notice effect is finished, it can be suppressed that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously performed, so that the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are continuously generated, It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player holds.

  In addition, after the end of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect according to the rule that the images related to the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect (“jellyfish” image) are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. Or by setting the one-off notice effect, even if the image of the continuous notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first fluctuating effect performed after detection of the start winning prize, the continuous notice is given in the next fluctuating effect. If the effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is an image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue playing the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines execution of the continuous notice effect, the number of pre-reading suspensions included in the pre-read command that triggers the execution determination (that is, continuous A value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variable effects for which a notice effect is performed) is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and each time a change pattern command that is a start instruction of a change effect is received, the continuous notice execution counter 223e is referred to. A continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 114 and the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1. If the value is 1, the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e is decremented by 1 without sending the continuous notice command. Configured to do. As a result, a continuous notice effect is performed over all the change effects that were held before the change effect for which the prediction result by the prefetch was notified by the prefetch command. In the fluctuating effects, the images of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect (“jellyfish” image) are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, among the variable effects held before the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, The number of variable effects for displaying the image related to the notice effect is determined, and the images related to the continuous notice effect are displayed for the determined number of variable effects, thereby executing the continuous notice effect. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is not necessarily provided with the continuous notice effect over all the variable effects that have been reserved before the variable effect for which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. The number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effect is performed among the variable effects is arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a continuous notice range table 222b is provided as a continuous notice determination table stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the continuous notice determination table 222a according to the first embodiment. . In addition, a prefetch information storage area 223g is provided instead of the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment. A continuous determination information storage area and a continuous avoidance flag are provided in each of the prefetch information 0th area to the prefetch information fourth area provided in the information storage area 223g.

  In the second embodiment, among various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, a part of the variable display process (S912) executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) and the main process The partial process of the command determination process (S913) executed in (see FIG. 29) and the partial process of the continuous notice determination process (S1025) which is one process in the command determination process are the same as those of the first embodiment. It differs from the pachinko machine 10.

  Other configurations in the pachinko machine 10, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, other than the above executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 This process and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The continuous notice determination table 222b is similar to the continuous notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is 15R probability change big hit or off. Is a table for setting “continuous notice determination probability”, which is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 is to execute the continuous notice effect. However, the continuous notice determination table 222b also determines the number of variable effects (hereinafter referred to as “number of continuous notices”) for performing the continuous notice effect when the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided, together with the probability of determining the continuous notice. This is different from the continuous notice determination table 222a in the first embodiment. The sound lamp control device 113 compares the continuous notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c, and when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is within the range indicated by the continuous notice determination table 222b, It is determined that the symbol display device 81 executes the continuous notice effect, and the number of continuous notices is determined from the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c (see S1051 and S1039 in FIG. 54). When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the control so that the continuous notice effect is performed over the fluctuating effects corresponding to the number of continuous notice effects determined together.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222b. As shown in FIG. 50, the continuous notice determination table 222b has two tables, a big hit time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and a losing time continuous notice determination table 222b2. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, and if the prediction result of the big hit lottery included in the prefetch command is 15R probability variable big hit, selects the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and selects the big hit lottery. If the prediction result is out of front and back, the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 222b2 is selected (see S1033 to S1036 in FIG. 54). Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit” or “out”).

  Both the big hit continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the losing continuous notice determination table 222b2 are only values “1” to “4” that can be taken as the number of prefetch hold of the prefetch command (the number of hold of the prefetched variation effect). Furthermore, the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined in association with the number of continuous notices.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the jackpot time continuous notice determination table 222b1 associates the prefetch hold count “1” with the continuous notice count “1” and sets “0-7” as the continuous notice determination range. Stipulate. In addition, the pre-read hold number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-7”, and the continuous notice number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “2”. The range is defined as “8-15”. Further, the pre-read hold count “3” is associated with the continuous notice count “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-12”, and the continuous notice count “2” is associated with the continuous notice count “2”. “13 to 25” is defined as the range, and “26 to 38” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices “3”. In addition, the pre-read hold number “4” is associated with the continuous notice number “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-15”, and the continuous notice number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “2”. “16 to 31” is defined as the range, is associated with the continuous notice count “3”, is defined as “32 to 47” as the continuous notice determination range, is associated with the continuous notice count “4”, and is determined as the continuous notice. The range is defined as “48 to 63”.

  Further, the out-of-track continuous notice determination table 222b2 defines “0 to 3” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices “1” with respect to the number of prefetch hold “1”. In addition, the pre-read hold number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-4”, and the continuous notice number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “2”. The range is defined as “5-9”. In addition, the pre-read hold number “3” is associated with the continuous notice number “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0 to 8”, and the continuous notice number “2” is associated with the continuous notice number “2”. “9 to 17” is defined as the range, and “18 to 26” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the number of consecutive notices “3”. Further, the pre-read hold count “4” is associated with the continuous notice count “1”, the continuous notice determination range is defined as “0-9”, and the continuous notice count “2” is associated with the continuous notice count “2”. “10-19” is defined as a range, associated with the number of consecutive notices “3”, “20-29” is defined as the range of consecutive notices, and is determined in correspondence with the number of consecutive notices “4”. “30 to 39” is defined as the range.

  In both the big hit continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the losing continuous notice determination table 222b2, if the prefetch hold count is “1”, the prefetch command is suspended before the fluctuating effect notified by the prefetch command. There is only one fluctuating effect, so there is only one fluctuating effect that can be set to execute the continuous notice effect. Therefore, these continuous notice determination tables 222b1 and 222b2 define the continuous notice determination range only for the number of consecutive notices “1”. Similarly, when the prefetch hold count is “2” to “4”, there are only 2 to 4 variation effects held before the variation effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command, Therefore, there are only 2 to 4 variable effects that can be set to execute the continuous notice effect. Therefore, these continuous notice determination tables 222b1 and 222b2 define the continuous notice determination range only for the number of continuous notices “1” to “2” when the number of prefetch hold is “2”, Is “3”, the continuous notice determination range is defined only for the consecutive notice counts “1” to “3”, and when the prefetch hold count is “4”, A continuous notice determination range is defined for all “4”.

  The number of continuous notices specified in the present embodiment is the number of variable effects in which the continuous notice effects are performed, including the prefetched variable effects to generate a prefetch command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. It is. Here, in the present embodiment, the continuous notice effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image during the changing effect, so the number of continuous notices determined in the present embodiment is a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect. Including the variation effect prefetched to generate the pre-read command, the “jellyfish” image is actually the number of variation effects displayed during the variation effect.

  On the other hand, when it is configured to display the “Jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, the continuous notice effect is executed. The “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect over the plurality of variation effects held at the time of the start winning prize corresponding to the variation change, except for the variation effect that is the trigger for the determination. Must be configured to display. Therefore, in this case, the number of continuous notices is the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed before the change effect, excluding the change effect prefetched to generate the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate the number of. By stipulating in this way, the number of consecutive notices in the case where the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third figure display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the third figure is configured to perform the continuous notice effect. This is the number of variation effects displayed during the variation effect of the “jellyfish” image.

  Therefore, in the continuous notice determination table in this case, when the prefetch hold count is “1”, there is no fluctuating effect that can display the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect, and therefore the prefetch hold count is “1”. It is not necessary to specify the scope of continuous notice determination. That is, when the prefetch suspension count is “1”, the continuous notice determination table may be configured not to determine execution of the continuous notice effect. Further, when the prefetch hold count is “2” to “4”, there are only 1 to 3 variation effects that are held before the variation effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, since there are only 1 to 3 variable effects that can be set to execute the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice determination table in this case is set to the number of consecutive notices “1” when the prefetch hold count is “2”. For example, when the continuous notice determination range is defined only for the number of pre-read hold times “3”, the continuous notice determination range is defined only for the continuous notice numbers “1” to “2”. In the case of “4”, the continuous notice determination range may be defined for the continuous notice numbers “1” to “3”.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 selects either the big success time continuous notice determination table 222b1 or the off-time continuous notice determination table 222b2 as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability, the look-ahead is selected from the selected continuous notice determination table. For the value of the prefetch hold count included in the command, the continuous notice determination range associated with each successive notice count is specified. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range associated with any number of continuous notices, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and the continuous notice lottery is further performed. The number of continuous notices associated with the continuous notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table and determined.

  For example, when the prefetch hold count indicated by the prefetch command is “4” and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the jackpot time continuous notice determination as the continuous notice judgment table. Select table 222b1. Then, with respect to the prefetch hold count “4”, “0 to 15”, “16 to 31”, and “32 to 47” are set as the continuous notice determination ranges associated with the consecutive notice counts “1” to “4”, respectively. "," 48 to 63 ".

  Here, if the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is “20”, it is included in the continuous notice determination range “16 to 31” associated with the number of continuous notices “2”, so the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided. Then, the number of continuous notices is determined to be “2”. Further, if the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is “60”, it is included in the continuous notice determination range “48 to 63” associated with the number of consecutive notices “4”. The number of continuous notices is determined as “4”. On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c is “65”, it is not included in the continuous notice determination range associated with any number of continuous notices, so the decision not to execute the continuous notice effect is performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the pre-read command, the execution is suspended before the change effect notified by the pre-read command by the pre-read command. Rather than performing continuous notice effects over all the variable effects, the number of variable effects for which the continuous notice effects are performed among the suspended variation effects is determined based on the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time. . Then, as will be described in detail later, continuous announcement effects for the determined number of variation effects, including the variation effects for which the prediction result by the prefetch was notified by the prefetch command that triggered the decision to execute the continuous notice effect, will be described later. Is configured to be set to run.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the conventional pachinko machine has the following problems. For example, it is assumed that a new start prize (entering the first entrance slot 64) is generated during the variation effect and the variation effect associated with the start prize is suspended. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notices) for performing the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the determined number of change effects including the change effect for which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified. In addition, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect may not be displayed from the change effect immediately after the start winning prize. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed from the variation effect immediately after the start winning prize and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent change effect, it is an image related to the single notice effect. Instead, since the player can expect that the images are related to the continuous notice effect, the sense of expectation for the single notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  As in the first embodiment, the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the losing time continuous notice determination table 222b2 in the example of FIG. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to make a decision to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of continuous notice determination becomes high. It can be said that both of the advance notice determination tables 222b2 are defined such that the greater the number of variable display suspensions in the main control device 110, the higher the continuous notice determination probability.

  Here, the continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  In the second embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, the continuous notice determination probability is defined so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined even when the prefetch suspension count is 1. Here, when the prefetch hold count is 1, if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as it is, the fluctuation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the fluctuating effect in which the prefetch process is performed to generate the prefetch command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image, which is the image of the continuous notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be obtained after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, which may diminish the expectation of the player's continuous notice effect on the “jellyfish” image. There is.

  On the other hand, the second embodiment is also configured so that a single notice performance is also performed. When the single notice execution flag 223f is on, execution is started at that time, or a fluctuating effect during execution, or finally This means that the execution of the single notice effect is set in the executed variation effect. Therefore, also in the second embodiment, when the number of pre-reading suspensions is one, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and when the one-shot notice execution flag 223f at that time is on, the prefetch process is performed. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the changed effect. As a result, the “jellyfish” image in the single notice effect can be displayed in the previous change effect, and the “jellyfish” image in the continuous notice effect can be displayed in the subsequent change effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear as if the continuous notice effect is performed over two consecutive variable effects, and the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit of 15R probability change.

  On the other hand, even if execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the number of reading suspension is one, if the one-time notice execution flag 223f at that time is OFF, in this embodiment, the variable effect for which the pre-read process has been performed is performed. On the other hand, it is configured to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has for the “jellyfish” image from diluting.

  Further, when the big hit continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 222b2 in the example of FIG. 50 are compared, as in the first embodiment, the continuous notice corresponding to the same value of the prefetch hold count The determination range is defined so that the big hit continuous notice determination table 222b1 is the same as or wider than the out of line continuous notice determination table 222b2. That is, the probability of continuous notice determination when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is the same as or more than the probability of decision of continuous notice when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out” Is set to be higher.

  As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to become a “hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the determination made when winning the ball to the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is more than the probability of “losing”. Is set to a small value, so if the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. The continuous notice effect can be easily performed.

  Thus, in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by prefetching performed when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 is not only a jackpot, but also in the case of a back and forth miss, Also, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be determined. That is, the continuous notice effect can be executed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. Moreover, even if it is a case where it loses as a result of a lottery, it can prevent that a player becomes bored by performing a continuous notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous notice determination range is defined so that the continuous notice determination probabilities of the consecutive notice counts are the same among the respective prefetch suspension times. Thereby, since the number of continuous notices is set equally, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 evenly from a continuous notice effect with a small number of continuous notices to a continuous notice effect with a large number of continuous notices. On the other hand, the continuous notice determination range may be defined so that the continuous notice determination probabilities for each number of consecutive notices are different among the respective prefetch hold counts. For example, the continuous notice determination range may be defined so that the continuous notice determination probability increases as the number of consecutive notices increases. When the continuous notice determination probability increases as the number of continuous notices increases, the number of continuous notice effects with a large number of continuous notices can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more than the continuous notice effect with a small number of continuous notices. Therefore, the continuous notice effect is often displayed over more variable effects. Therefore, since the player's expectation that is a 15R probability variation big hit every time a continuous notice effect is displayed in each variation effect can be continued for a longer time, the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by defining the continuous notice determination range in association with the continuous notice count “1” in the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 222b, the number of consecutive notices is one time. However, if the number of continuous notices is 1, the “Jellyfish” image, which is an image of the continuous notice effect, is displayed as the third symbol only for one variation effect. It will not be displayed on the device 81. Therefore, in this case, a “15R jackpot” may be obtained after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, which may diminish the expectation of the player's continuous notice effect on the “jellyfish” image. There is also. Therefore, in the big success time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 222b, the continuous notice number “1” may not be associated with the continuous notice determination range, and the number of consecutive notices may not be determined once.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the prefetch hold count is 1, the execution of the continuous notice effect with the continuous notice count of one is determined only when the single notice notice execution flag 223f is on. Thus, it is possible to make it appear as if the continuous notice effect was performed over two continuous fluctuation effects. Therefore, in the big success time continuous notice determination table 222b1 and the out-of-line continuous notice determination table 222b, the pre-read hold count is 2 or more, the continuous notice count “1” is not associated with the continuous notice determination range, and the consecutive notice count is 1 The times may not be determined.

  As a result, when performing the continuous notice effect, the “jellyfish” image will be displayed at least twice in a row, so the player continues to have an expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has for the “jellyfish” image. Can be made.

  The prefetch information storage area 223g is predicted by the main controller 110 by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the start winning, similarly to the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment. In addition, this is an area for storing information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command transmitted by the main controller 110. On the other hand, the prefetch information storage area 223g further avoids execution of continuous determination information, which is information for determining whether or not to set execution of a continuous notice effect with respect to a pending change effect, and execution of a continuous notice effect. It differs from the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment in that it stores information indicating whether or not it should be.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223g. The prefetch information storage area 223g is different from the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment in that the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas are further provided with a continuous determination information storage area and a continuous avoidance flag, respectively. Is a point. Since other configurations and functions in the prefetch information storage area 223g are the same as those in the prefetch information storage area 223b in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of each prefetch information first to fourth areas and the value of the continuous notice avoidance flag are: Along with the information stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the information stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the value of the prefetch information valid flag, each of the prefetch information 0th to 3rd areas having a smaller area number Are stored in the continuous determination information storage area, continuous avoidance flag, jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and prefetch information valid flag.

  The continuous determination information storage area is an area for storing continuous determination information, which is information for determining whether or not to set execution of a continuous notice effect for a pending variable effect. Specifically, this continuous determination information indicates how many times the remaining variable effects including the variable effects are set to be executed when the corresponding variable effects perform the continuous warning effects. Consists of information. The continuous notice determination information includes “0” as information indicating that the corresponding variable effect does not perform the continuous notice effect.

  For example, when “3” is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the first-read information first area, the continuous determination information “3” is a variation effect (the next execution is executed). In other words, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the remaining three variations. In addition, when “0” is stored as continuation determination information in the continuation determination information storage area of the pre-read information fourth area, in the variation effect (variation effect executed through three variation effects) with the number of holdings being four times. Indicates that no continuous notice effect will be given.

  As described above, among the pre-read information first to fourth areas, the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information first area is executed first, and then the pre-read information second area, the pre-read information third area, Corresponding variation effects are executed in the order of the pre-read information fourth area. Therefore, when “3” is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area, the continuous determination information “3” includes the remaining 3 including the variation effect with the number of hold times of one. In view of the fact that the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variation effect of the batch, “2” is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area, and the prefetch information That is, “1” is stored as the continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the third area.

  That is, the continuous determination information “2” stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the second prefetch information second area remains including a variable effect (a variable effect executed through one variable effect) with the number of times of holding twice. It shows that execution of the continuous notice effect is set with respect to the fluctuation effect for two times. On the other hand, the continuation determination information “1” stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the third area of the pre-read information includes the variation effect (the variation effect executed through two variation effects) with the number of times of holding three times. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set for one change effect, that is, the change effect with the number of holding times of three is the last change effect for which the continuous notice effect is executed. That is, of the pre-read information first to fourth areas, the area in which the continuous determination information “1” is stored in the continuous notice continuous determination information storage area is included in the pre-read command that triggers the determination of execution of the continuous notice effect. It means an area for storing information.

  The continuous avoidance flag is a flag indicating whether or not execution of the continuous notice effect is avoided for the variable effect corresponding to each area for each of the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas including the continuous avoidance flag. is there. When this continuous avoidance flag is on, regardless of the information stored in the continuous determination information storage area, the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas including the continuous avoidance flag in the on state is included. The execution of the continuous notice effect is avoided. On the other hand, when the continuous avoidance flag is off, if the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage areas of the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas including the continuous avoidance flag in the off state is a value of 1 or more. The execution setting of the continuous notice effect is performed for the variable effects corresponding to the pre-read information areas 0 to 4.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag will be described. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for describing the continuous determination information set in the continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag. 52 (a) to 52 (g), the contents of the continuous determination information stored in each of the continuous determination information storage areas of the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas and the continuous notice avoidance flag are shown as the game progresses. The setting status and the status of execution of the continuous notice effect performed based on the content of the continuous determination information and the setting status of the continuous avoidance flag are shown. The contents of the continuous determination information storage area shown in each of FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (g) are shown on the leftmost side as the content of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area. The contents of the continuous determination information storage areas of the information third area, the prefetch information second area, and the prefetch information first area are shown. And the content of the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is shown on the rightmost side.

  First, FIG. 52A shows the continuous determination information storage of each prefetch information 0th to 4th areas in the initial state immediately after the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28) executed after power-on. Shows the contents of the area. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28), the continuous determination information storage areas of the respective prefetch information 0th to 4th areas are all variable effects corresponding to that area. “0” which is information indicating that the continuous notice effect is not performed is stored. The initial state in which the initial setting process of the RAM 223 is performed is a state before the prefetch command is received from the main controller 110, and therefore, the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined. Therefore, in this initial state, by storing “0” in the continuous determination information storage areas of all the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas, it is possible to indicate a state where the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined. .

  Note that the continuous avoidance flags for each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas are all set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S810 in FIG. 28) executed after power-on. That is, in the initial state shown in FIG. 52A, the continuous avoidance flags of all the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas are turned off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous notice effect from being suddenly avoided when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in the subsequent processing.

  Next, FIG. 52 (b) shows a look-ahead with a pre-read hold count of 3 after the audio lamp control device 113 receives several pre-read commands from the main control device 110 from the initial state shown in FIG. 52 (a). When the command is received and the execution of the continuous notice effect over two variable effects is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command based on the continuous notice determination table of FIG. The contents of the continuous determination information storage area in the fourth area are shown.

  Here, when the execution of the continuous notice effect ranging from the content of the prefetch command with the prefetch hold count X being X times to the Y variation effect is determined, each continuous determination information storage area in each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas is stored. The continuation determination information is stored in the following procedure. Note that the pre-read information 0th area is an area for storing information on the fluctuating effect immediately before starting execution, during execution, or immediately after execution, and the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the reception of the pre-read command. The continuation determination information is not newly stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. This is because the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the pending variable effect.

  As a procedure for storing the continuous determination information, first, as a first procedure, the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information X area corresponding to the number of prefetch hold of the prefetch command that triggers the determination of execution of the continuous notice effect is set in the continuous determination information storage area. 1 "is stored. Thereby, it can be shown that the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read command that is the trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect is the last variable effect for which the continuous notice effect is set. Here, if the number of continuous notices Y, which is the number of fluctuating effects for executing the continuous notice effect, is “1”, the storage of the continuous determination information is terminated in this first procedure.

  On the other hand, if the continuous notice count Y, which is the number of fluctuating effects for executing the continuous notice effect, is “2” or more, as a second procedure, the pre-read information No. (XA) area (1 ≦ A <Y) (A + 1) is stored in the continuous determination information storage area. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52B, since the prefetch suspension count X is 3 and the continuous notice count Y is 2, “2” is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 1). Store. On the other hand, when the prefetch hold count X is 3 and the continuous notice count Y is 3, “3” is further stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area (A = 2).

  When the prefetch hold count X is 4 and the continuous notice count Y is 4, the second procedure is performed after setting “1” in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area in the first procedure. Then, “2” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information third area (A = 1), “3” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 2), “1” is stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area (A = 3).

  Therefore, according to this procedure, the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the prefetch command that triggered the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect is obtained for each continuous determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas. While being set to “1”, from the area toward the area corresponding to the variation effect that is reserved earlier (that is, in the direction of decreasing the area number in the pre-read information first to fourth areas), Continuous determination information is set as many times as the number of variable effects (that is, the number of continuous notifications) for executing the continuous notification effects so that the value is increased by one in order. As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous notice effect for the continuous determination information storage areas of the respective prefetch information first to fourth areas, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous notice effect.

  However, in this procedure, if the information “1” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of any one of the pre-read information first to fourth areas where the continuous determination information is to be set, the area before that area is stored. The new continuous determination information is not stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held on the left, and the already stored information is left. When information “1” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of any area, execution of the continuous notice effect is already set for the variable effect reserved before that area. Therefore, by not storing new continuation determination information for these areas, the previously set continuous notice effect can be executed with priority.

  In the case where the continuous notice effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the change effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, a trigger for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect. In order to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect over the plurality of variation effects held at the time of the start winning prize corresponding to the variation change, except for the variation effect that has become. The procedure for storing the continuous determination information needs to be slightly different from the above.

  Execution of the continuous notice effect ranging from the content of the prefetch command with the prefetch hold count X to the Y fluctuation effect (however, this “Y fluctuation effect” includes the fluctuation effect that triggered the decision to execute the continuous notice effect) Is determined and the “Jellyfish” image is actually displayed.) Is determined, first, as a first procedure, in the pre-read information No. (X-1) area in the continuous determination information storage area. “1” is stored. As a result, the variation effect that was suspended one time before the variation effect corresponding to the number of prefetch hold of the prefetch command that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect is the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set. You can show that there is. Here, if the number of continuous notices Y, which is the number of fluctuating effects for executing the continuous notice effect, is “1”, the storage of the continuous determination information is terminated in this first procedure.

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous notices Y, which is the number of fluctuating effects that execute the continuous notice effect, is “2” or more, as a second procedure, the pre-read information No. (X-1-A) area (1 ≦ A < (A + 1) is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of Y).

  For example, when the prefetch suspension count X is 4 and the continuous notice count Y is 4, “1” is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information third area in the first procedure, and in the second procedure, “2” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area (A = 1), and “3” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information first area (A = 2).

  Therefore, according to this procedure, for each continuous determination information storage area of each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas, the area immediately preceding the area corresponding to the prefetch command that triggered the determination of execution of the continuous notice effect. While setting the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the variation effect to “1”, from the area toward the area corresponding to the variation effect reserved earlier (that is, in the pre-read information first to fourth areas). The continuous determination information is set as many times as the number of fluctuating effects (that is, the number of continuous notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the value is increased by 1 in order. As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous notice effect for the continuous determination information storage areas of the respective prefetch information first to fourth areas, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous notice effect.

  Even in this procedure, if information “1” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of any area in which the continuous determination information is to be set in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information, that area is stored. The previously stored information is not stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the area corresponding to the variation effect previously suspended, and the already stored information is left. As a result, the previously set continuous notice effect can be preferentially executed.

  Note that, in the state of FIG. 52 (b), the continuous avoidance flags of the prefetch information first to fourth areas are all kept off.

  Next, FIG. 52 (c) shows a state when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (b) and a variation effect is started in the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the various information stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas is transferred to the prefetch information zeroth to third areas. Shift processing. At this time, the continuation determination information stored in the continuation determination information storage area of each prefetch information first to fourth area and the value of the continuation avoidance flag are also prefetch information Nos. 0 to 3 having a smaller area number, respectively. The shift process is performed by storing in the area continuous determination information storage area and the continuous avoidance flag.

  That is, in the example of FIG. 52C, the continuous determination information “2” stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information second area in the state of FIG. The continuous determination information “1” that has been shifted to the determination information storage area and stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information third area in the state of FIG. Shifted to area.

  In addition, the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become empty due to the shift process is a stage where the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the corresponding variable effect, “0” is stored. Further, the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF.

  Here, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, shifts the prefetch information storage area 223g, and then refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. If the information is other than “0”, the display control device 114 is configured to display the “Jellyfish” image, which is an image of the continuous notice effect, on the third symbol display device 81 for the variation effect to be started. Send a continuous notice command. On the other hand, if the continuous determination information is “0”, the continuous notice effect is not performed in the variation effect. In FIG. 52 (c), the information in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is “0”. Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the continuous notice effect is not performed for the changing effect to be started.

  In the state of FIG. 52 (b), although the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the information in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is “0” at the stage of FIG. 52 (c). The continuous notice effect is not performed when the present embodiment is in the state shown in FIG. 52 (b), along with the execution decision of the continuous notice effect, and how many times the continuous notice effect determined to be executed varies. This is because it is determined whether to perform over the production, and accordingly, the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage areas of the pre-read information first to fourth areas.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is assumed that a new starting prize (entrance to the first entrance 64) occurs during the fluctuation presentation, and the fluctuation presentation accompanying the starting prize is suspended. . When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notices) for performing the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined, and accordingly, the pre-read information first to fourth areas are determined. Since the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect may not be displayed from the variation effect immediately after the determination. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed from the variation effect immediately after the start winning prize and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent change effect, it is an image related to the single notice effect. Instead, since the player can expect that the images are related to the continuous notice effect, the sense of expectation for the single notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed by the continuous notice execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, which of the pending effect effects is selected. It cannot be specified until the continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notifications) for which the continuous notice effect is performed every time the determination of the continuous notice effect is determined, the variable effect that triggers the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect. Execution of the continuous notice effect cannot be set for the fluctuating effects for the number of consecutive notices including. In this way, after determining the number of variable effects (number of continuous notifications) to be performed every time a continuous notice effect is determined, the variable effects that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect are included. The reason why the execution of the continuous notice effect can be set with respect to the fluctuating effects corresponding to the number of continuous notices is that the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas as in this embodiment. . That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous notice effect one by one with respect to the pending change effect, so that the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined. After determining the number of variable effects to be performed (number of consecutive notices), execute the continuous notice effects for the variable effects for the number of consecutive notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

  Next, FIG. 52 (d) receives a prefetch command having a prefetch hold count of 4 from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (c). The content of the continuous determination information storage area in each prefetch information 0th-4th area at the time of determining execution of the continuous notification effect over three fluctuation effects based on the continuous notification determination table is shown.

  At this time, according to the procedure described with reference to FIG. 52 (b), the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage areas of the pre-read information first to fourth areas. In the example of FIG. 52D, “1” is set in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area in the first procedure, and the prefetch information third area (A = 1) in the second procedure. “2” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area. However, in the example of FIG. 52 (d), since information “1” is stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the second pre-read information area, the pre-read is an area corresponding to the variation effect suspended before that area. For the information second area and the prefetch information first area, new continuation determination information is not stored, but the information already stored is left. For example, “3” that is the new continuation determination information is not stored in the continuation determination information storage area of the second prefetch information second area (A = 3), and the already stored information “1” is left as it is. Accordingly, the previously set continuous notice effect is preferentially executed.

  Next, FIG. 52 (e) shows a state when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (d) and a variation effect is started in the audio lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (e), various types of information stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (d) are shifted to the prefetch information 0th to third areas and stored. The In addition, “0” is stored as the continuation determination information in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become free due to the shift process, and the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF. The

  After the shift process is performed, the audio lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. In the example of FIG. 52 (e), since the information is “2”, the audio lamp control device 113 displays “Jellyfish”, which is an image of a continuous notice effect for a change effect to be executed from now on by a change pattern command. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 is controlled to transmit a continuous notice command.

  Next, FIG. 52 (f) shows a state when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (e), and the variation effect is started in the sound lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (f), various information stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (e) is shifted to the prefetch information 0th to third areas and stored. The In addition, “0” is stored as the continuation determination information in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become free due to the shift process, and the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF. The

  After the shift process is performed, the audio lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. In the example of FIG. 52 (f), since the information is “1”, the audio lamp control device 113 displays “Jellyfish” which is an image of a continuous notice effect with respect to the change effect to be executed from now on by the change pattern command. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 is controlled to transmit a continuous notice command. Further, when the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area is “1”, the number of continuous notice effects set for the variable effect to be executed from now on is one or more. This means that it is a continuous notice effect performed for the last variable effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over the fluctuating effects. Therefore, in this case, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is always set to ON. Here, the meaning of setting the continuous avoidance flag to ON will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 (g) shows a state when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the state of FIG. 52 (f) and a variation effect is started in the sound lamp control device 113. In the state of FIG. 52 (g), various information stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas in the state of FIG. 52 (f) is shifted to the prefetch information 0th to third areas and stored. The Among these, the state of the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area set to ON in the state of FIG. 52 (g) is also shifted to the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area in FIG. 52 (f). That is, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag for the prefetch information 0th area is set to ON. In addition, “0” is stored as the continuation determination information in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information fourth area that has become free due to the shift process, and the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF. The

  Here, normally, after the shift process is performed, the audio lamp control device 113 refers to the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area, and executes the continuous notice effect according to the continuous determination information. Set up. However, in the state of FIG. 52 (f), the continuous avoidance flag for the prefetch 0th area is set to ON. Thus, when the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch 0th area is set to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the content of the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area. Nevertheless, the execution of the continuous notice effect is avoided (although it is “2” in the example of FIG. 52 (g)).

  The ON state set in the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is originally shifted from that set in the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch 1st area in the state of FIG. 52 (f). Here, the state of FIG. 52 (f) is a state when the changing effect performed immediately before the changing effect started in FIG. 52 (g) is started. In FIG. 52 (f), a continuous notice effect performed for the last variable effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), when the continuous notice effect performed for the last change effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more change effects so far is set, the prefetch first area By always setting the continuous avoidance flag to ON, it is possible to always avoid the execution of the continuous notice effect in the next variation effect. Thereby, it can suppress easily that a continuous notice effect is performed continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch 0th area is set to ON, it is configured to avoid the execution of the single notice effect. Subsequently, it is also suppressed that a single notice effect is performed.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous notice effect is set in the continuous notice execution counter as it is, If the continuous notice execution counter is larger than 0 at the time of the performance, the continuous notice effect is performed for the variable effect, and the value of the continuous notice execution counter is subtracted by 1 to continuously notify the variable effect as many times as initially set. It is comprised so that a production may be performed. When configured in this way, after one continuous notice effect is completed, the continuous notice effect may start again, that is, the continuous notice effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variation effect in the first continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and if the last variation effect in the subsequent second continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player You will have a feeling of That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variation effect in the first continuous notification effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that the single notification effect is performed in the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed and lost once as a result of the first continuous notice effect will continue the game with the assumption that the continuous notice effect will continue by looking at the display of the single notice effect. Although there is a possibility, since the image for the continuous notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's intention will be betrayed as a result. In this way, by configuring as described above, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be lowered as a result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new start prize (entrance to the first entrance 64) occurs during the fluctuation presentation, and the fluctuation presentation accompanying the start prize is suspended. Assume a case. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect in the single change effect after the continuous notice effect has ended. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in expectation with respect to the continuous notice effect held by the player, which is caused by continuously performing the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect.

  In addition, after completion of the continuous notice effect, by setting the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect according to the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect, the operation is started. Even if the image of the continuous notice effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue playing the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the continuous avoidance flag storage area is provided in each of the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223g has been described. May be provided. In this case, if the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is “1” when the variation effect is started (for example, FIG. 52 (f)), it is provided in the RAM 223. The continuous avoidance flag may be set to ON. Further, when the variation effect is started, the continuous avoidance flag provided in the RAM 223 is referred to, and if it is on, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is not performed, and the continuous avoidance flag is controlled. May be set to off. As a result, it is possible to avoid the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect in the single fluctuation effect after the continuous notice effect is completed, so the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is performed continuously. It is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player holds.

  In the second embodiment, when a variation pattern command, a stop type command, or a look-ahead command is destroyed in a command destruction determination performed when a variation pattern command is received or a stop type command is received, If it is determined that it is determined, the setting of the continuous notice effect is not performed regardless of the continuous determination information stored in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area, as in the first embodiment. The “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type command (S1009: No in FIG. 53, S1110: Yes in FIG. 55). reference).

  Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern command, the stop type command, or the look-ahead command is destroyed and the above-described special variation effect is performed, when the “Jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, normally It may be a rare effect that a “jellyfish” image is displayed in a special variation effect that is not displayed, and it is unclear what gaming state will be given after the end of the special variation effect Nevertheless, there is a risk of giving the player an excessive expectation that it will be a big hit. And when it comes off as a result, a player may be disappointed and there is a possibility that the interest in a game may be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is configured not to be displayed in such a case, so that it is possible to go to the game without giving the player a big expectation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of the continuous notice effect execution set at that time, as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the setting of the continuous notice effect is canceled by storing “0” in all the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area (see S1025 in FIG. 53). As described above, when the pre-reading command is received, the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the received pre-reading command is 15R probability variation jackpot or out of front and back. In addition, it is performed at a predetermined rate. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to cause the player to expect 15R probability variation jackpot with the highest game value after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, even if it is off after the end of the continuous notice effect, the fluctuation pattern at the outage can make the player expect most of whether or not it will be a big hit until the end of fluctuation change. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to continue increasing the expectation that the player has in the continuous notice effect until the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is stopped and displayed.

  However, when the predictive state change command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 is likely to have an incorrect prediction result notified by the previously transmitted prefetch command, and is thus set based on the erroneous prefetch command. If the continuous announcement effect is performed to the end, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be “15R probability variation jackpot” in the last variation effect, or even if it is missed, it will not be “rear out of reach”. . As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a result different from that expected.

  Next, referring to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, command determination processing (S913), continuous notice determination processing (S1020), and variation display processing (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. ) Will be described. The other processes executed by the MPU 221, that is, the startup process (see FIG. 28), the main process (see FIG. 29), and the vibration sensor input monitoring process (FIG. 30) are the processes of the first embodiment. Therefore, illustration and description are omitted here.

  First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This command determination process (S913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first embodiment, and is received from the main control device 110. Is determined.

  Among the command determination processes, the processes of S1001 to S1023 and S1024 are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1001 to S1023 and S1024 in the first embodiment, respectively.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1021 that the predicted state change command has been received (S1021: Yes), all the prefetch information 0th areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are similar to those in the first embodiment. After the prefetch information valid flag of the fourth area is set to OFF (S1022), in the second embodiment, the process of S1025 is executed instead of the process of S1023 in the first embodiment, and then the process returns to the main process.

  In the process of S1025, “0” is stored as continuous determination information in all the continuous determination information storage areas of the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas. Thereby, when the predicted state change command is received, it is possible to cancel all the settings for the execution of the continuous notice effect previously set for the pending change effect.

  When the prediction state change command is received, there is a high possibility that the prediction result notified by the prefetch command sent earlier is incorrect, so the continuous notice effect set based on the erroneous prefetch command is performed to the end. In that case, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will not be the “15R probability variation jackpot” that should occur after the continuous notice effect, or it may not be “rear out of reach” even if it is missed. . As a result, the player is greatly different from the expectation he / she has when the continuous announcement effect is performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the predicted state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 cancels the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect set at that time, so that the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of results different from those expected.

  In the command determination process, when it is determined that the command is destroyed (S1005: Yes or S1009: No), the process of S1013 is skipped, and the continuous notice command is not set. However, as in the first embodiment, in addition to that, the execution of the currently set continuous notice effect may be cleared. For example, the process of setting the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1007 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If the continuous notice command is not set only for the fluctuating effects for which the destruction of the command is determined, a situation may occur in which the “Jellyfish” image is temporarily not displayed during the continuous notice effect, There is a possibility that a player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be questioned as to whether the big hit lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and all currently executed continuous notice effects are cleared, the “Jellyfish” image will not be temporarily displayed during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, details of the continuous notice determination processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice determination process (S1020) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This continuous notice determination process (S1020) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (FIG. 53) that a prefetch command has been received (S1018: Yes). From the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process, over the variation effect for the start win before or before the start win that triggered the acquisition of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the pre-read process was performed, It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect that continuously displays the notice effect image. Further, in the continuous notice determination process in the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of continuous notices that is the number of variable effects for performing the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Among the continuous notice determination processes, the processes of S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1032 to S1037 and S1039 to S1041 in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in this continuous notice determination process, when this process is started, the process of S1032 is first executed without performing the process of S1031 performed in the continuous notice determination process in the first embodiment. Further, after the process of S1037, the process of S1051 is executed instead of the process of S1038 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S1051, the number of look-ahead holds extracted in the process of S1037 from the continuous notice determination table (the big hit time continuous notice determination table 222b1 or the off-time continuous notice determination table 222b2 shown in FIG. 50) selected by the processes of S1033 to S1036. For the value of (that is, the number of prefetch hold included in the received prefetch command), the continuous notice determination range associated with each successive notice number is specified. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223c at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range associated with any number of continuous notices, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and the continuous notice lottery is further performed. The number of continuous notices associated with the continuous notice determination range including the value of the counter 223c is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table and determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1039.

  Thereafter, in the process of S1039, based on the result of the process in S1051, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (S1039), and when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect (S1039: No) ), Skips the subsequent processing and returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, if execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as a result of the process of S1039 (S1039: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the prefetch suspension count extracted in the process of S1037 is 1 (S1040). As a result, if the prefetch suspension count is not 1, that is, 2 or more (S1040: No), the process proceeds to S1052. As a result of the process of S1040, if the prefetch suspension count is 1 (S1040: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the single notice execution flag 223f is on (S1041), and the single notice execution flag 223f is on. If there is (S1041: Yes), the process proceeds to S1052, and if the single notice execution flag 223f is off (S1041: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

  The process of S1052 is executed in place of the process of S1042 in the first embodiment. Depending on the prefetch hold count extracted by the process of S1037 and the continuous notice count determined by the process of S1051, FIG. According to the procedure described with reference to the above, information “1” to “4” is stored as continuous determination information in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information area corresponding to each variation effect. And after the process of S1052 is complete | finished, it returns to a command determination process.

  Thereby, when performing the continuous notice effect by displaying the “jellyfish” image during the change effect, the continuous notice effect is executed for each of the continuous determination information storage areas of the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information. While setting the continuation determination information of the area corresponding to the prefetch command that triggers the determination to “1”, the area is moved from the area toward the area corresponding to the variation effect suspended earlier (that is, the prefetch information number 1). In the first to fourth areas (in the direction of decreasing area numbers), continuous determination is made by the number of variable effects (that is, the number of continuous notifications) for which continuous notification effects are executed so that the value increases in order by one. Information is set.

  In addition, when the continuous notice effect is performed by displaying the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect, that is, immediately after the stop display of the third symbol, each pre-read information first to fourth. For each continuous determination information storage area of the area, “1” is set as the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the variation effect immediately before the area corresponding to the pre-read command that triggered the determination of execution of the continuous notice effect. From the area toward the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held earlier (that is, in the direction of decreasing the area number in the pre-read information first to fourth areas). The continuous determination information is set as many times as the number of variable effects (that is, the number of continuous notices) for executing the continuous notice effect.

  As a result, when the corresponding variation effect performs the continuous notice effect for the continuous determination information storage areas of the respective prefetch information first to fourth areas, the remaining number of variation effects including the variation effect It is possible to store continuous determination information indicating whether to set execution of the continuous notice effect.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 executes the pre-reading process prior to the start of the execution of the variation effect based on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the start winning prize, and the lottery lottery And the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern is predicted. Then, the prediction result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command, and the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of the variation effects previously held from the prefetch hold count included in the prefetch command. From the jackpot lottery notified by the look-ahead command, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be performed for the pending change effect, and the number of continuous notices that is the number of the change effects for executing the continuous notice effect is determined. . Then, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effects corresponding to the determined number of continuous notices, including the variable effect in which the prediction result by the prefetch is notified by the prefetch command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. . As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be shifted based on the start winning, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, while the sound lamp control device 113 If the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used, it is possible to set various aspects of the continuous notice effect, execution conditions, and the like.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if the one-off notice effect is performed in order to expect the development to the continuous notice effect, the timing at which the start prize is established and the timing at which the one-shot notice effect is displayed In view of the above, there is a possibility that the player can easily guess that the image of the single notice effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous notice effect. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notices) for performing the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the determined number of change effects including the change effect for which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified. In addition, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect may not be displayed from the change effect immediately after the start winning prize. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed from the variation effect immediately after the start winning prize and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent change effect, it is an image related to the single notice effect. Instead, since the player can expect that the images are related to the continuous notice effect, the sense of expectation for the single notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  If the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as it is when the prefetch hold count is 1, the change effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is only the change effect for which the prefetch process has been performed in order to generate the prefetch command. Therefore, the “jellyfish” image that is the image of the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, in this case, there is a case where the “15R probability variation jackpot” is obtained after displaying the “jellyfish” image once, and the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has is diminished. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, when the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is on, it means that the execution of the one-shot notice effect is set in the variation effect that is started or executed at that time, or the last-executed variation effect. To do. Thus, as in the present embodiment, if the pre-reading suspension count is 1, execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, and if the single notice execution flag 223f at that time is on, the process of S1052 is executed. By storing “1” in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch hold first area, the “Jellyfish” image in the one-shot notice effect is displayed in the previous change effect among the two consecutive change effects. It is possible to display the “jellyfish” image in the continuous notice effect with the change effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player appear as if the continuous notice effect is performed over two consecutive variable effects, and the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit of 15R probability change.

  On the other hand, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined when the number of reading suspension is one, if the one-shot notice execution flag 223f at that time is off, the process of S1052 is skipped, and the prefetch suspension first area is By not storing “1” in the continuous determination information storage area, it is possible to suppress the case where the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only for one variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the expectation for the continuous notice effect that the player has for the “jellyfish” image from diluting.

  In the present embodiment, in the continuous notice determination process, when the number of prefetch hold is 1, the case where execution of the continuous notice effect is set only when the single notice execution flag 223f is on has been described (S1040). -1042). On the other hand, even if the processing of S1040 and S1041 is omitted and the number of prefetch hold is 1, the continuous notice is based only on the lottery result of the continuous notice effect execution in S1051 regardless of the state of the single notice execution flag 223f. Execution of production may be set. Further, when the prefetch hold count is 1, it may be configured to always set the execution of the continuous notice effect with one continuous notice count.

  This often results in a “15R probability variation jackpot” after one “jellyfish” image is displayed, diluting the expectation of the player's continuous notice effect on the “jellyfish” image. On the other hand, when a player visually recognizes a “jellyfish” image that has not been displayed for a variation effect so far, with a certain variation effect, the player It is possible to have a strong expectation that is a 15R probability variation jackpot in the “jellyfish” image. Therefore, since various appearances can be held by the appearance of the “jellyfish” image, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the variation display process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variable display process (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This variation display process (S912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 and is received from the main control device 110, as in the first embodiment. Processing for generating a variation pattern command for display based on the pattern command, processing for determining command destruction for the received variation pattern command, and variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the generated variation pattern command for display A process for determining whether to perform a continuous notice effect or a single notice effect is performed for the effect.

  Among the variable display processes, the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 are executed in the same manner as the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115, and S1121 of the variable display process in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the special variation flag is on as a result of the process of S1110 (S1110: Yes), the process of S1121 is not performed without performing the process of S1120 executed in the first embodiment. Transition to processing. Here, the reason for not performing the processing of S1120 in the first embodiment is that in the second embodiment, the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas in the first embodiment. This is because the continuous notice execution counter 223e is not provided.

  Further, in the second embodiment, whether or not to execute the one-shot notice effect is determined by the process of S1111, and according to the result, the one-shot notice execution flag 223f is set to ON by the process of S1112, or the one-shot notice execution flag is set by the process of S1113. After the notice execution flag 223f is set to OFF, the process proceeds to S1131.

  In the process of S1131, it is determined whether or not the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is off (S1131). As a result, if it is not off but on (S1131: No), the subsequent process is skipped and the process returns to the main process. As a result, since the process of S1115 is also skipped, the continuous notice execution flag is not set to ON, and accordingly, a variation effect (hereinafter, “current variation” is started by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1106. The execution of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is not set for the “effect”.

  As described above, the continuous notice effect performed for the last variable effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more variable effects has been set in the previously performed variable effect. In this case, when the execution of the next variation effect (that is, the present variation effect) is started, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is always turned on. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect performed for the last change effect is set among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more change effects until then, in the next change effect (current change effect) The execution of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being executed continuously or the single notice effect from being executed continuously to the continuous notice effect.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the number of the variable effects for performing the continuous notice effect is set as it is in the continuous notice execution counter, and the continuous notice is given when the variable effect is executed. If the execution counter is greater than 0, the continuous notice effect is performed over the first set number of variable effects by subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice execution counter while performing the continuous notice effect in the variation effect. It is configured. When configured in this way, after one continuous notice effect is completed, the continuous notice effect may start again, that is, the continuous notice effect may occur continuously.

  As a result, for example, if the last variation effect in the first continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the special reach, and if the last variation effect in the subsequent second continuous announcement effect is out of front and back in the normal reach, the player You will have a feeling of That is, after the first continuous notice effect is displayed over a plurality of variable effects, the special reach appears on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that is a 15R probability change big hit. continue. And if the result of the special reach is out of front and back, the player will be disappointed once, but since the second continuous notice effect will continue to be displayed, the player will have a stronger sense of expectation that will be a 15R probability change jackpot. Become. However, as a result, if the normal reach is out of front and back, there is a risk of giving the player a feeling of being downgraded more than the front and back out of special reach displayed earlier.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, after the last variation effect in the first continuous notification effect is out of front and back, there is a possibility that the single notification effect is performed in the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the player who is disappointed and lost once as a result of the first continuous notice effect will continue the game with the assumption that the continuous notice effect will continue by looking at the display of the single notice effect. Although there is a possibility, since the image for the continuous notice effect is not displayed after that, there is a possibility that the player's intention will be betrayed as a result. In this way, by configuring as described above, there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the continuous notice effect will be lowered as a result.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, for example, a new start prize (entrance to the first entrance 64) occurs during the fluctuation presentation, and the fluctuation presentation accompanying the start prize is suspended. Assume a case. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, it is possible to avoid setting the execution of the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect in the single change effect after the continuous notice effect has ended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation with respect to the continuous notice effect held by the player, which is caused by continuously performing the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect.

  In addition, after completion of the continuous notice effect, by setting the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect according to the rule that the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect, the operation is started. Even if the image of the continuous notice effect, that is, the “jellyfish” image is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first variation effect performed after the winning is detected, the “jellyfish” image is the third symbol in the next variation effect. If the display device 81 is used, the player can have a sense of expectation that it is a “jellyfish” image displayed as a continuous notice effect.

  Thus, by configuring the continuous notice execution counter 223e as in the present embodiment, the player can continue playing the game while enjoying the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1131, if the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is off (S1131: Yes), then the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is greater than 1. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S1132). As a result, when the value is larger than 1 (S1132: Yes), the process proceeds to S1115, and the continuous notice execution flag is turned on (S1115). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process.

  If the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is 1 or less as a result of the processing of S1132, the further information in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is further stored. It is determined whether or not the information (value) is 1 (S1133). As a result, when the information (value) in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is 1 (S1133: Yes), the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information 1st area is set to ON (S1134). Then, the process proceeds to S1115, and the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON (S1115). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process.

  Thus, if the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area is 1 or more, the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON by the processing of S1115. Thereby, when a stop type command is received thereafter, control is performed so that a continuous notice command is transmitted to the display control device 113, and a “jellyfish” image that is an image of a single notice effect with respect to a variable effect is displayed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the process of S1052 of the continuous notice determination process (FIG. 54), the look-ahead that triggered the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect for each of the continuous decision information storage areas of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information. While setting the continuous determination information of the area corresponding to the command to “1”, from the area toward the area corresponding to the variation effect suspended earlier (that is, in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information) Continuation determination information is set for the number of variable effects (that is, the number of continuous notices) for executing the continuous notice effect so that the value increases one by one in order as the area number decreases.

  Therefore, in this variation display process, every time a variation pattern command is received (that is, every time the variation start flag is turned on), the pre-read information 0th area is continuously determined while shifting the data in the pre-read information storage area. When the information (value) in the information storage area is 1 or more, the continuous notice execution flag is turned on to turn on the continuous notice effect, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process, the continuous notice determined at the same time A “jellyfish” image relating to the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the variation effect for the number of times.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the pre-read command, the execution is suspended before the change effect notified by the pre-read command by the pre-read command. Instead of performing the continuous notice effect over all of the fluctuating effects, the continuous notice effect is performed over the fluctuating effects corresponding to the number of times of continuous notice determined together with the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above, the following problems may occur. For example, it is assumed that a new start prize (entering the first entrance slot 64) is generated during the variation effect and the variation effect associated with the start prize is suspended. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notices) for performing the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined, and the look-ahead command that triggers the execution decision of the continuous notice effect. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the determined number of change effects including the change effect for which the prediction result by the pre-reading is notified. In addition, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect may not be displayed from the change effect immediately after the start winning prize. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed from the variation effect immediately after the start winning prize and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent change effect, it is an image related to the single notice effect. Instead, since the player can expect that the images are related to the continuous notice effect, the sense of expectation for the single notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  If the information (value) in the continuation determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is 1, the continuation avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to ON by the processing of S1134. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area is 1, it is performed for the last variation effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more variation effects so far. This means that the continuous notice effect to be set is set for the current fluctuation effect. In the present embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to ON by the processing of S1134. Therefore, when the next variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information storage area 223g is set. On the other hand, by performing the shift process, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is set to ON. Therefore, for the variation effect for the next variation pattern command, the continuous notice execution flag is not always set to ON by the processing of S1131. Therefore, as described above, the continuous avoidance flag in the prefetch information first area is set to ON to indicate that the continuous notice effect is continuously executed or that the single notice effect is executed continuously after the continuous notice effect. This can be easily suppressed.

  As a result of the processing of S1133, when it is determined that the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is not 1, that is, 0 (S1133: No), Since the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set, it is then determined whether or not the single notice execution flag is on (S1135). As a result, if the single notice execution flag is on (S1135: Yes), execution of the single notice effect is set for the current variation effect, so the process proceeds to S1115 and the continuous notice execution flag is turned on. (S1115). Then, the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1135, if the single-shot notice execution flag is not on but off (S1135: No), the execution of the single-shot notice effect is not set for the current variation effect, so the process of S1115 is performed. Skip and return to the main process.

  Thereby, even if the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not made, it is possible to display the “jellyfish” image on the third symbol display device 81 in one shot for one variation effect. Here, when attention is paid to one variation effect, in both the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect, the “jellyfish” image matches the change effect in that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when a “jellyfish” image that was not displayed in at least the previous variation effect is displayed in the variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “jellyfish” image displayed in the continuous notice effect is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while considering whether it is a “image” or a “jellyfish” image displayed in a single notice effect. When the “jellyfish” image is displayed again in the next variation effect, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a continuous notice effect, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. .

  The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the single notice effect is the same “jellyfish” image as the continuous notice effect. Therefore, since it is sufficient to instruct the display control device 114 to display the “jellyfish” image with respect to the fluctuating effect without distinguishing between the single notice effect and the continuous notice effect, the single notice effect is set. In both cases, the continuous notice execution flag is set to ON in the variation display process even when the continuous notice effect is set. Thereby, after the continuous notice execution flag is turned on, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are not limited to the execution of the single notice effect or the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect. In the same processing flow, the “jellyfish” image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the variation effect. Therefore, simplification of the program in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command is destroyed (S1105: No), the special variation flag is turned on (S1107), and the special variation flag is displayed. Is turned on (S1110: Yes), the process of setting the continuous notice execution flag to ON is not executed regardless of the contents of the single notice lottery counter 223d and the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area, and continuously. It was configured not to set the notice effect. Instead, when it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed (S1105: No), the prefetch information No. 0 is set together with setting the special variation flag to ON. By setting the area continuous avoidance flag to ON, the process of setting the continuous advance notice execution flag to ON is not executed regardless of the contents of the single notice advance lottery counter 223d or the pre-read information 0th area continuous determination information storage area. It may be. If the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is set to ON together with setting the special variation flag to ON, the variation display process is terminated without setting the continuous advance notice execution flag according to the determination in S1131. Can do. In this case, the process of S1110 may be omitted.

  In addition, when it is determined that one or both of the pre-read command and the variation pattern command is destroyed, the setting is not made so that the continuous notice effect is not set. You may be made to clear all execution of the continuous notice effect. For example, the process of setting the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e to 0 may be performed before and after the process of S1107 executed in a state where it is determined that the command is destroyed.

  If the continuous notice command is not set only for the fluctuating effects for which the destruction of the command is determined, a situation may occur in which the “Jellyfish” image is temporarily not displayed during the continuous notice effect, There is a possibility that a player who understands that the effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects may be questioned as to whether the big hit lottery is correctly performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the command has been destroyed and all currently executed continuous notice effects are cleared, the “Jellyfish” image will not be temporarily displayed during the continuous notice effect. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In this embodiment, the execution of the single notice effect is performed every time the change pattern command is received. Instead, the execution of the single notice effect is determined every time the prefetch command is received. You may comprise. For example, in the command determination process (FIG. 53), when it is determined that a prefetch command is received (S1018: Yes), if the value of the single notice lottery counter 223d is 10, for example, the prefetch indicated by the prefetch command The execution of the single notice effect may be set with respect to the fluctuating effect for which the is performed. In this case, each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is provided with a single notice execution flag indicating that the single notice effect is executed when it is on. When this single-shot notice execution flag is set to OFF as an initial value and execution of a single-shot notice effect is set, the single-shot of the area corresponding to the number of pre-read commands held pre-read among the pre-read information 0th to 4th areas is set. Set the notice execution flag to on. In the variable display process, the shift process is performed between the pre-read information 0th area and the fourth area including the single notice execution flag by the process of S1103, and the single notice of the pre-read information 0th area is performed in S1135. It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. Further, the process of S1041 of the continuous notice determination process (FIG. 54) also determines whether or not the single notice execution flag in the prefetch information 0th area is on. Note that in the shift process of S1103, the one-shot notice execution flag of the pre-read information fourth area that has become empty is set to OFF. In this case, the processing of S1111 to S1113 and the processing of S1121 in the variable display processing can be omitted.

  In this way, by determining the execution of the single notice effect every time a prefetch command is received, the single notice of the pending variable effect is determined in the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect that is performed every time the prefetch command is received. It is possible to consider whether or not performance execution is set. For example, when the execution of the single notice effect is set for the pending change effect, it can be determined that the execution setting of the continuous notice effect is not performed. If such a determination is made, the one-shot notice effect is more easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when the “jellyfish” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, this is due to the one-shot notice effect. It is possible to make the player think more strongly whether it is a thing due to a continuous notice effect or not. In this way, in the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect performed every time the prefetch command is received, more consideration is made by considering whether or not the execution of the single notice effect is set for the pending change effect. Since the execution of the production can be determined in consideration of the conditions, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified by the prefetch command, the prediction result by the prefetch using the prefetch command. Instead of performing the continuous notice effect over all the variable effects that were held before the notice of the change effect that was notified of, the continuous notice effect over the variable effects for the number of consecutive notices determined in conjunction with the decision to execute the continuous notice effect Is configured to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, a new start prize (entering the first entrance 64) is generated during the variation effect, and the variation effect accompanying the start prize is suspended. Is assumed. When pre-reading processing is performed for this starting prize and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, the decision to not perform the continuous notice effect is made and the continuous notice effect is not performed in the next variable effect In addition, even if a single notice effect is performed in the next variation effect, if no image of the continuous notice effect is displayed in the first variation effect performed after detection of the start prize, a new start prize is not detected after that. As long as the image of the single announcement effect displayed in the subsequent variation effect cannot be the image displayed as the continuous announcement effect, the player may easily guess. Therefore, there is a risk that the player's expectation for the single notice effect will also be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notices) for performing the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined, and accordingly, the pre-read information first to fourth areas are determined. Since the continuous determination information is stored in the continuous determination information storage area, even if the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect may not be displayed from the variation effect immediately after the determination. Therefore, even if the “jellyfish” image related to the continuous notice effect is not displayed from the variation effect immediately after the start winning prize and the “jellyfish” image is displayed in the subsequent change effect, it is an image related to the single notice effect. Instead, since the player can expect that the images are related to the continuous notice effect, the sense of expectation for the single notice effect is further increased, and the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed by the continuous notice execution counter as in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, which of the pending effect effects is selected. It cannot be specified until the continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of variable effects (the number of continuous notifications) for which the continuous notice effect is performed every time the determination of the continuous notice effect is determined, the variable effect that triggers the determination of the execution of the continuous notice effect. Execution of the continuous notice effect cannot be set for the fluctuating effects for the number of consecutive notices including. In this way, after determining the number of variable effects (number of continuous notifications) to be performed every time a continuous notice effect is determined, the variable effects that triggered the execution decision of the continuous notice effect are included. The reason why the execution of the continuous notice effect can be set with respect to the fluctuating effects corresponding to the number of continuous notices is that the continuous determination information storage area is provided in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas as in this embodiment. . That is, by configuring in this way, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous notice effect one by one with respect to the pending change effect, so that the continuous notice effect is determined every time the continuous notice effect is determined. After determining the number of variable effects to be performed (number of consecutive notices), execute the continuous notice effects for the variable effects for the number of consecutive notices including the variable effect that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. Can be set.

  In the second embodiment, if the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the prefetch information 0th area is 1, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information first area is set to ON. Here, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-read information 0th area is 1, it is performed for the last variation effect among the continuous notice effects that have been performed over one or more variation effects so far. This means that the continuous notice effect to be set is set for the current fluctuation effect. In this embodiment, in such a situation, the continuous avoidance flag in the first prefetch information first area is set to ON, so that when the next variation pattern command is received, a shift process is performed on the prefetch information storage area 223g. Is performed, the continuous avoidance flag of the prefetch information 0th area is set to ON. Therefore, the continuous notice execution flag is not always set to ON for the variation effect for the next variation pattern command. Therefore, simply by setting the continuous avoidance flag in the pre-read information first area to ON, the continuous notice effect is executed continuously or the single notice effect is executed continuously after the continuous notice effect. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the counters C1 to C3 acquired at the timing of the start winning prize. , CS1 is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e separately from the reserved ball storage area 203b, and then stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. A case has been described in which the value of each counter is pre-read and a pre-read process for predicting the results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination is executed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j at the start winning timing are set before the start timing of the execution of the variation effect. A pre-reading process for predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed by directly reading from the reserved ball storage area 203j and prefetching.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments in that the main controller 110 is provided with a RAM 203 instead of the RAM 203. Further, in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the variation process (S109) and the start winning process (S110), and the prefetching process (S703) in the main process (see FIG. 25). ) Are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the configuration of the RAM 203 is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The RAM 203 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed, like the RAM 203 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It has at least a reserved ball storage area 203j and a prefetch hold count storage area 203k that are not in the RAM 203 of the embodiment or the second embodiment. On the other hand, the RAM 203 of this embodiment has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a prefetching probability change flag 203h, and a predicted state change flag 203i having the same configuration and functions as those of the first embodiment. About another structure, since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 56, the sound lamp control device 113 has the same configuration as that of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. Good.

  The reserved ball storage area 203j is the same as the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 57) upon detection of the start winning prize. , A memory for storing each value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship among various counters provided in the RAM 203, the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the reserved ball execution area 203c. Various counters provided in the RAM 203 are a first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1, a first initial value random number counter CINI1, a second per random number counter C4. The two initial value random number counter CINI2 has the same configuration and function as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, CINI1, C4, and CINI2 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and is a counter that is an area of the RAM 203. Stored in the buffer. These counters are updated in the same manner as in the first or second embodiment during the timer interrupt process or the main process. Further, when a start winning is detected, among these counters, a first per-random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, a first per-species symbol counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and a stop symbol when coming off are displayed. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the variation pattern to be stopped and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of big hit are read from the counter buffer and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. Stored.

  In the reserved ball storage area 203j, as in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, data corresponding to one start winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is a maximum of four times. It has four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) so that it can be stored (holding). When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. Among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) provided in the holding ball storage area 203j, in order from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth), The acquired counter value is stored.

  Each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) stores a first per-random number counter storage area 203j1 that stores the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 that stores the value. A per-type counter storage area 203j2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203j4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. These counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 are respectively a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and a variation type in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. This has the same configuration and function as the counter storage area 203b4.

  In the present embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203j1, the first per-type counter storage area 203j2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203j3, and the variation type counter storage area 203j4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although provided in 203j, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203j1, 203j2, 203j3, 203j4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the first embodiment or the second embodiment between the reserved first to fourth areas and the reserved ball execution area 203c of the reserved ball storage area 203j. A similar shift process is performed. As a result, the data stored in the counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4 of the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the counters of the holding ball execution area 203c. Shifted to areas 203c1 to 203c4, respectively. Then, the MPU 201 refers to the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c in the change start process (see FIG. 22), performs a big hit lottery based on the reference data, and changes corresponding to the lottery result. The pattern and stop type are determined. In the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Now, the difference between the reserved ball storage area 203j and the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is that a pre-read execution flag 203j5 is provided in each reserved area (holding first to fourth areas). It is a point. This prefetch execution flag 203j5 is a flag indicating whether or not prefetch processing has been executed in the reserved area where the prefetch execution flag 203j5 is provided. In the case of, it indicates that the prefetch process has not been executed.

  The prefetch execution flag 203j5 is initialized to OFF in the RAM initial setting process (see S613 in FIG. 24) executed when the power is turned on. Further, when storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the timing at which a first entry to the first entrance 64 (start winning) is detected, in one reservation area of the reservation ball storage area 203j, The prefetch execution flag 203j5 of one reserved area storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is set to OFF. Accordingly, it is indicated that the prefetching processing is not executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area. On the other hand, when prefetching processing is executed in which the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in one reserved area are prefetched to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the one reserved area is set. Set to on, indicating that prefetch processing has been performed.

  Further, when a shift process is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas, the values set in the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of the respective reserved second to fourth areas are stored in the other counter storage areas 203j1 to 203j4. Along with this value, the pre-read execution flag 203j of the area (first to third) having an area number smaller by 1 is shifted. That is, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the hold second area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the hold first area, and the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the hold third area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the hold second area. Then, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 in the reserved third area. In this way, by shifting the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j together with the value of each counter, the prefetch processing is performed on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each reserved area according to the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j. It can be accurately shown whether or not.

  It should be noted that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c are being used for the big win lottery or the like with the execution start timing of the changing effect, or have already been used for the big hit lottery or the like. Since it is a value after being used, the prefetch process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Thus, no pre-read execution flag is provided for the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are shifted from the reserved first area to the reserved ball execution area 203c, the value of the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. No processing is performed.

  The MPU 201 repeatedly executes a prefetch process described later with reference to FIG. 61 in the main process (see FIG. 25), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the prefetch process. Reference is made to the prefetch execution flag 203j5 in the reserved area. If there is a reserved area where prefetching is not executed, the counter area where the counter value is held first among the unexecuted reserved areas, i.e., the area number of the highest among the reserved areas where prefetching is not executed. A prefetch command (FIG. 8) that prefetches each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the small holding area, predicts the results of the big hit lottery and variation pattern determination, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction results. Execute prefetch processing for setting (see). Then, until it is confirmed that prefetching processing is being executed for all the holding areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held, the MPU 201 The prefetch process is continued for the reserved area where each counter value is reserved first. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are pre-read in the order in which they are reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203j, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are sequentially obtained. Prefetching processing to be predicted can be executed.

  When the MPU 201 executes the prefetch process in one hold area, as described above, the MPU 201 sets the prefetch execution flag of the one hold area to ON to indicate that the prefetch process has been executed in the hold area. Thereby, it can suppress that a prefetch process is performed again with respect to the holding area.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held by the prefetching process (see FIGS. 25 and 61) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process. The prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved area is referred to, and when there is an unexecuted reserved area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the unexecuted reserved area are prefetched for each reserved area. Then, a prefetch process for predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed. Also, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment mobile phone, the big hit lottery performed at the start of execution of the fluctuating effect is a process in the timer interrupt process that is executed with priority over the main process. It is executed in a certain variation start process (see FIG. 22).

  Here, apart from the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect, the pachinko machine is pre-read so as to prefetch each counter value acquired and held at the start winning prize and predict the result of the jackpot lottery When configured, the jackpot lottery needs to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning prize and each winning value one by one. In the prefetching process, the prefetched value is different from the jackpot lottery. It is necessary to compare each hit value one by one. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, the comparison process between the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big win lottery and the prefetch process, for example, the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value and the winning value performed in each of the big winning lottery and the prefetching processing.

  Under such circumstances, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winnings detected after the start winnings corresponding to the changing effects at the start of the changing effects as in the conventional gaming machine. If the pre-reading process is used, prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be performed, in parallel with the fact that the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed. There is a risk of affecting the game, for example, the completion of the big hit lottery, which is an important process, is delayed.

  Further, in the timer interruption process, a process of determining the start of the fluctuating effect and executing a big win lottery, a start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and a prefetch process is executed. In the case where the process is included, it may occur that the jackpot lottery process and the pre-reading process are performed together in one timer interruption process based on the determination of the start of the variation effect and the detection of the start winning. . As described above, since each process may take a long processing time, in this case, there is a situation in which all the processes included in the timer interrupt process are not completed until the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls necessary for the game are delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, as described above, the prefetch process is executed in the main process, while the big hit lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variable effect is performed by the timer interruption. It is configured to be executed in a variation start process (see FIG. 22) which is one of the processes. Thereby, even if the prefetch process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be reliably completed because it is executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetch process is executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. However, since the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the game can be normally controlled.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j at the start winning timing are directly read from the holding ball storage area 203j and pre-read, and the big hit lottery and the variation pattern A prefetching process for predicting the result of the determination is executed. As a result, the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect is reached during the prefetch process, and when the shift process is performed between the first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203j, the hold area during the prefetch process is shifted. However, an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description is continued. In the pre-read hold count storage area 203k, among the hold first to fourth areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203j, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area that is executing the pre-read process is stored. This is an area for storing the number of holdings that are kept pending as the number of pre-reading holdings. That is, if the reserved area in which the prefetching process is being executed is the reserved first area, the number of times the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area are continuously held is one. Therefore, “1” is stored as the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k.

  Similarly, if the reserved area in which the prefetch process is being executed is the hold second area, “2” is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, and the hold area in which the prefetch process is being executed is the hold third area. For example, “3” is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, and if the hold area that is executing the prefetch process is the hold fourth area, “4” is set as the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k. Stored.

  The pre-read hold count stored in the pre-read hold count storage area 203k is included in the pre-read command generated as a result of the pre-read process, and is combined with the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can grasp the number of suspensions of the variation effect executed according to the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process.

  The prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is referred to when the MPU 201 executes the prefetch process. From the hold area corresponding to the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read and prefetched, and the results of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted.

  Here, the setting of the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is performed when the prefetch of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in one hold area is started during the prefetch process. This is performed by storing the number of stored counters of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k (see S787 in FIG. 61). The number of pre-reading suspensions stored in the pre-reading suspension number storage area 203k as the shift process is performed between the suspension first to fourth areas of the storage ball storage area 203j with the execution start timing of the variation effect. 1 is subtracted (see S321 in FIG. 59).

  Here, when a shift process is performed between the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203j, the reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process are stored is the area number. Move to one smaller area. In contrast, in the third embodiment, as the shift process is performed, the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is decremented by 1, so the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is Even when the shift process is performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect during the prefetching process, the number of holdings of each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process and the counter value are stored. The reserved area can be accurately indicated.

  Therefore, by including the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k in the prefetch command, the audio lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command predicts the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of fluctuating effects to be executed according to the result.

  Further, when executing the prefetch process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, and from the hold area corresponding to the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the start timing of the fluctuating effect during the pre-read process, there is no problem even after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift process has been performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j during the prefetching process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are directly read out. Even when pre-reading, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

  As described above, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h has the same configuration and function as the prefetching probability variation flag 203h in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. However, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is the first. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetch processing when executing the prefetch processing based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. A prefetch process is executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area indicated by the prefetch hold count storage area 203k among the hold first to fourth areas provided in the hold ball storage area 203b. Is referenced by the MPU 201.

  If the prefetching probability change flag 203h is off, the gaming state that can be assumed by the pachinko machine 10 when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the reserved area to be prefetched is a low probability state Therefore, after setting the winning value to “7,307,582”, the result of the jackpot lottery is predicted.

  On the other hand, if the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on, the gaming state that can be assumed by the pachinko machine 10 when the actual jackpot lottery is performed based on the counter value stored in the reserved area to be prefetched is a high probability state Since it is predicted to be in the (probable variation state), the winning value is set to “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506. 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ", and the result of the big hit lottery is predicted (see S787 in FIG. 61).

  In the first or second embodiment, the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Although it was performed according to the prediction result of the predicted jackpot lottery, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area indicated by the prefetch hold count storage area 203k are prefetched. It is performed according to the predicted result of the predicted jackpot lottery. That is, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery performed by the processing of S787 of the prefetch process in FIG. Therefore, the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON (see S790 in FIG. 61). If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is other jackpot, that is, the 15R normal jackpot, it is predicted that the gaming state will shift to the low probability state after the actual jackpot lottery is performed, so the look-ahead probability change flag 203h Is set to OFF (S792 in FIG. 61). Further, if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is off, it is predicted that the gaming state will be maintained as it is, so the value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h is maintained as it is (S791: Yes branch in FIG. 61).

  However, in the third embodiment as well, the prefetching process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the variation effects, so the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h is based only on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the process of S787. Therefore, there is a possibility that the prediction of the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed may be greatly shifted. Therefore, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the value of the pre-reading probability variation flag 203h is set in consideration of the result of the original jackpot lottery, and the original jackpot lottery is performed. The gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is predicted (S404 to S408 in FIG. 60). Thereby, even when the pre-reading process is not necessarily executed for the counter values corresponding to all the changing effects, the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted with higher accuracy. Can be done.

  In the third embodiment, the prediction state change flag 203i is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. That is, when the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state), the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is off. When the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to ON, or when the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to a low probability state, the prefetching probability change flag 203h is ON. For this reason, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON (see S409 in FIG. 60).

  If the result of the original jackpot lottery is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot” and the gaming state shifts to a high probability state (probability variation state), the prefetch probability variation flag 203h is turned off. When the flag 203h is set to ON, or when the result of the original jackpot lottery is other jackpot (15R normal jackpot) and the gaming state shifts to a low probability state, the prefetch probability change flag 203h is ON Therefore, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, it means that the prefetching processing is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the original big hit lottery has been performed. There is a high possibility that the prefetching probability variation flag 203h indicates an erroneous prediction state. Therefore, the prediction result by the pre-reading performed before that including the pre-reading being executed in the main process is predicted based on an erroneous game state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is highly possible that

  Therefore, also in the third embodiment, by setting the prediction state change flag 203i to ON in such a case (see S409 in FIG. 60), the prefetching performed previously including the prefetching currently performed is incorrect. It can be shown that there is a high possibility of being performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  In the first or second embodiment, the MPU 201 is stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e in the prefetch process (see FIG. 26) executed in the main process. In the case where it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON while prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the prefetching is stopped (S758 in FIG. 26: Yes, In S768: Yes), in the third embodiment, the MPU 201 stores the counter stored in the hold area indicated by the prefetch hold count storage area 203k in the prefetch process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process. While the values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to on. When it is detected that, to suspend the prefetching (S794 of FIG. 61: Yes). Thereby, it can suppress that prefetching is performed based on the value of the erroneous prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  In the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, the first or second embodiment As in the embodiment, a predicted state change command is set (S799 in FIG. 61) and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when receiving the prediction state change command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets all prediction results by the prefetch process stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid. Thereby, it can suppress that various control by prefetching is performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61) executed in the main process, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the correct state that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10, the prefetching process is executed again using the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held on hold.

  Here, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of one holding area in which various counter values are held among the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203b. The value is transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the hold count corresponding to the hold area is stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203d5 or the prefetch hold count storage area 203e5 as the prefetch hold count. Further, by setting the first prefetch processing flag 203f or the second prefetch processing flag 203g to ON, the prefetching is performed again for the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to which the transcription has been made. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of all the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203j are set to OFF, and the prefetching is performed in all the reserved first to fourth areas. By indicating that the processing has not been executed, the pre-reading is performed again for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j (see FIG. 61). (See S2701).

  As a result, the prefetch processing is performed based on the correct prefetch probability change flag 203h value, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take, with respect to the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j. Is executed, and the sound lamp control device 113 can be notified of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  In addition, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the predicted state change flag 203i sets the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that perform prefetching again in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Later it was set off. In contrast, in the third embodiment, when the MPU 201 detects that the prediction state change flag 203i is on during the prefetching process, the MPU 201 sets the prediction state change flag to off (see S2702 in FIG. 61).

  In the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the predicted state change flag 203i is included in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), which is a process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201. When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are referred to and detected by detecting the start winning are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, if the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the value is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch processing flag 203e or the second prefetch processing flag 203f is set to ON. Although the processing is not executed, in the third embodiment, such a configuration is not necessarily required. Because in the third embodiment, each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is directly read and the prefetch process is executed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, Before the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for performing prefetching again are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. Alternatively, it is not necessary to suppress storage in the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. This start winning process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) executed every 4 milliseconds in preference to the main process (FIG. 25) (S110). It is determined whether or not there is a start winning (start winning) to 64, and if there is a starting win, a process of storing (holding) the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. It is.

  Among the start winning processes, in each process of S201 to S205, the same processes as the respective processes of S201 to S205 of the start winning process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are executed. When the process of S205 is completed, in the start winning process in the third embodiment, the process of S221 is executed instead of the processes of S206 to S214 of the start winning process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In the process of S221, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 provided in the reserved area (any one of the reserved first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the process of S205 is set to OFF. . Then, after the process of S221, the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 provided in the holding area (any one of the holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the process of S205 is set to OFF. By this, it can be shown that the prefetching processing is not executed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in one holding area of the holding ball storage area 203j with the start winning. Accordingly, the MPU 201 performs prefetching on the newly stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the prefetching process (see FIG. 61), and predicts the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. To do.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. This variation process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) executed every 4 milliseconds in preference to the main process (FIG. 25) (S109), and the first symbol display device 37. And the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled.

  Among these fluctuation processes, the processes of S301 to S305, S310, and S312 to S317 are executed in the same manner as the processes of S301 to S305, S310, and S312 to S317 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, respectively. The In addition, the variation start process in S311 is obtained by omitting a part of the variation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. On the other hand, in the variation processing in the third embodiment, when the processing in S305 is completed, the processing in S321 is executed instead of the processing in S306 to S309 in the variation processing in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  That is, as a result of the determination in S304, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), and it is determined that it is the start timing of execution of the variation effect. When the value (the number of held balls N) is decremented by 1 (S305), the value of the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is decremented by 1 (S321), and the process proceeds to S310. Thereafter, in the process of S310, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted, and the first symbol display device 37 is based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the shift process. And the fluctuation start process with respect to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed (S311), and it returns to a timer interruption process.

  As described above, in the process of S321, with the execution start timing of the variation effect, the shift process is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203j, and the prefetch hold count storage area 203k. 1 is subtracted from the prefetch hold count stored in.

  As described above, when the shift process is performed between the first to fourth areas in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are stored Move to the area with the smaller number. On the other hand, in the process of S321, as the shift process is performed, the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is decremented by 1, so the prefetch hold count in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is the prefetch process. Even when the shift process is performed at the start timing of the fluctuating effect, the number of times the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held during the prefetching process and the holding area in which the counter values are stored Can be accurately shown.

  Therefore, by including the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k in the prefetch command, the audio lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command predicts the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of fluctuating effects to be executed according to the result.

  Further, when executing the prefetch process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, and from the hold area corresponding to the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j at the start timing of the fluctuating effect during the pre-read process, there is no problem even after the shift process. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, since it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift process has been performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j during the prefetching process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j are directly read out. Even when pre-reading, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a change start process (S311) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As described above, the fluctuation start process is one process of the fluctuation process. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a lottery for “big hit” or “out” (big hit lottery) And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Then, the variation start process in the third embodiment includes a process of setting the first prefetch processing flag 203f to off from the variation start process in the first embodiment or the second embodiment (S410), and a second prefetch process. The process of setting the middle flag 203g to off (S411) is omitted. That is, in the variation start process in the third embodiment, after the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON by the process of S409, the process proceeds to S414. In the third embodiment, since each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is directly read and the prefetching process is executed, the first embodiment or the second embodiment is used. The first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e are not provided. Therefore, the first prefetch processing flag 203f and the second prefetch processing flag 203g are not provided. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the process of turning off these flags is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. This pre-reading process is a process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (FIG. 25) (S701), and each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the detection of the start winning is obtained. Pre-reading before referring to the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, and predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the determination result of the variation pattern in advance.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the pre-read execution flag 203j5 of each holding area (holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the holding ball storage area 203j is respectively referred to. From the reserved areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, the reserved areas that have not been pre-read are extracted (S785). The reserved area where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved is determined from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a. That is, when the value of the held ball number counter 203a is “1”, it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held only in the held first area, and the value of the held ball number counter 203a is “ 2 ”, it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the holding first to second areas, and when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is“ 3 ”, the holding number When it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the first to third areas, and the value of the held ball number counter 203a is “4”, the counters C1 to C1 are held in the first to fourth areas. It is determined that the values of C3 and CS1 are reserved. Then, in the process of S785, the reserved area where the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of each reserved area is off is determined as the reserved area where the prefetching is not executed.

  Next, based on the result of the process of S785, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed (S786). If there is a reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed (S786: Yes), first, prefetching is not performed. The number of holdings of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area that is held first among the execution holding areas, that is, the holding area with the smallest area number among the holding areas that have not been read-ahead, is read-ahead. The count is set in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k (S787).

  Thus, the prefetching of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 thereafter is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area corresponding to the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k. That is, if the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is “1”, prefetch is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first area, and the prefetch hold count storage area. If the prefetch hold count stored in 203k is “2”, prefetch is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area, and the prefetch hold stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k. If the count is “3”, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold third area, and the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is “4”. For example, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area.

  Here, in the process of S787, the number of holdings of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area that has been held first among the holding areas where prefetching has not been executed is set as the number of prefetching holdings in the prefetching holding number storage area 203k. Therefore, the prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold area that is held first among the hold areas where the prefetch is not executed. As a result, in the prefetching process, prefetching can be executed in the order in which it is put on hold, and prefetching can be performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 having the shortest time until the original big hit lottery or the like is performed. . Therefore, it is possible to pre-read many counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, when the timer interruption process is executed during the pre-reading process and the value of the pre-read hold count in the pre-read hold count storage area 203k is decremented by 1 as the execution start timing of the variation effect, the pre-read hold count after the subtraction. The prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to. As described above, when the shift process is performed between the first to fourth areas in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the reserved area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are stored Move to the area with the smaller number. On the other hand, in the prefetching process, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to the number of prefetching holds after subtraction. Even when the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 203j, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process can be prefetched without any problem after the shift process.

  Next, the value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h and the first per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the hold area corresponding to the prefetch hold count of the prefetch hold count storage area 203k (hereinafter referred to as “prefetch target hold area”) are stored. The result of the jackpot lottery is predicted from the value of the random number counter C1 per hit (S788). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first per-random number counter C1 in the pre-read target holding area matches a random value (win value) that is a big hit, and is predicted to be a big hit if it matches one of the win values. To do. Moreover, when it does not correspond with all the winning values, it is predicted that it is out of place.

  At this time, the winning value is determined by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the prefetched counter value indicated by the prefetching probability change flag 203h. It is set according to a possible gaming state (mode). That is, it is predicted that the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-reading counter value is off and the normal low probability state is predicted. The winning value is set to “7,307,582”. On the other hand, when the prefetching probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the prefetched counter value is predicted to be in a high probability state The hit value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656. 681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892 ".

  In the process of S788, if the prediction result of the big win lottery is predicted to be a big win, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the prefetch target holding area is further prefetched to predict the big hit type determination result. To do. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of the prefetch target reservation area according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG.

  In the processing of S788, finally, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination including the prediction result of the jackpot type determination is included in the four patterns of “out”, “15R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”, and “2R probability variation jackpot”. .

  In the subsequent process of S789, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch target hold area are prefetched, and the result of the variation pattern determination is predicted (S789). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788 is a jackpot, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, premiere From the reach A to C and the 2R fluctuations A to C, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the processing of S788 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the prefetch target holding area And predicting the variation pattern associated with.

  Also, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the processing of S788 is out of place, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the prefetch target holding area, The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is predicted from among front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, and complete outage. At this time, in the same way as the processing of S412 of the variation start processing (see FIG. 22), the original big hit lottery (execution of the variation effect) is performed according to whether the prefetching probability variation flag 203h is off or on, that is, based on the prefetched counter value. Stop patterns corresponding to each stop type depending on whether the state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing) is a low probability state or a high probability state Tables having different value ranges of the selection counter C3 are set.

  Then, based on the predicted stop type, according to the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetching probability change flag 203h is performed, the deviation shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination result is predicted based on either the variation pattern table for deviation or the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table shown in FIG. That is, when the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is off and the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a low probability state in the normal state excluding the short-time state, FIG. c) Based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table shown in c), the predicted stop type and the variation in the reserved area subject to prefetching from among various short reach, various out of normal reach, various out of super reach, various out of special reach The fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the type counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

  When the pre-reading probability change flag 203h is on and the gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, FIG. ) Based on the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) shown in Fig. 3, the predicted stop type and the variation type of the pre-read target reserved area from among various short reach, long deviate, deviate normal reach, deviant super reach, and deviant special reach. The fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter storage area 203d5 is predicted.

  In the process of S789, the prediction results of the variation pattern determination are finally classified into six patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, “premier reach”, and “2R probability change”. That is, when the predicted variation pattern is “out of short” or “out of long”, it is classified as “out”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various normal reach” or “various normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various types of super reach” or “various types of super reach”, it is classified as “super reach”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. When the predicted fluctuation pattern is “Premier Reach A” to “Premier Reach C”, it is classified as “Premier Reach”. When the predicted fluctuation pattern is “2R fluctuation A” to “2R fluctuation C”, it is classified as “2R fluctuation”.

  In the subsequent process of S790, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the process of S788 is a probable variation jackpot (S790). Here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot. If it is a probable big hit (S790: Yes), the prefetching probabilistic flag 203h is set to ON (S791), and the process proceeds to S794. Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high probability state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S790 that the jackpot lottery is not probable (S790: No), it is then determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery by the processing of S788 is out of place (S792). If it is not off (S792: Yes), the prediction result of the big hit lottery is 15R normal big hit, so the prefetch probability change flag 203h is set to off (S793), and the process proceeds to S794. Thereby, in the prefetch process performed after that, the game state which the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low probability state. Further, when it is determined as a result of the processing of S792 that it is out (S792: Yes), the processing proceeds to S794 as it is. Thereby, the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h is maintained.

  In the process of S794, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S794). As a result, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on, it means that there is a high possibility that the prefetching performed before including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. To do. In other words, when the process of S794 is executed, the pachinko machine when the pre-reading performed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-read target holding area is performed when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It also means that there is a high possibility that the game is performed after erroneously recognizing 10 possible gaming states. Therefore, in this case, the prefetching currently being performed is stopped (S794: Yes), and the process proceeds to S799. By canceling the prefetching that is currently being performed, prefetching is performed based on an erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, and notification of the prediction result to the voice lamp control device 113 can be suppressed. Note that the process of shifting to S799 will be described later.

  Note that whether or not the prediction state change flag 203i is on may be determined at any time during the processing of S787 to S793, as well as the processing of S794. If the predicted state change flag 203i is on, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S799. By performing the determination at any time, when prefetching is performed based on the incorrect value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h, the prefetching can be stopped earlier. In addition, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding wastefully based on the erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S794, if the predicted state change flag 203i is not on, that is, is off (S794: No), the process proceeds to S795, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S788 And the prediction result of the variation pattern prediction predicted by the process of S789 and the pre-read hold count stored in the pre-read hold count storage area 203k are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the prefetch command shown in FIG. 8 is set. (S795). The prefetch command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and this prefetch command is the voice lamp control in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) to be executed next. Is transmitted to the device 113.

  In the process of S795, when the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value, the process proceeds to S786 without setting the prefetch command. As described above, this prefetch process is performed regardless of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the main process. Thereby, even if one prefetch process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds. In the variation process (FIG. 59), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected, the pending 1 is held regardless of whether the prefetch process is being performed. The execution of the fluctuation effect is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the prefetching process, there may be a case where the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the prefetching process is completed.

  Here, when the execution timing of the change effect is detected, in the above-described change process, a process of subtracting 1 from the prefetch hold count is executed (S321). Therefore, when the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetch pending count is 0 or a negative value Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed before the prefetching process, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot perform the setting of the continuous notice effect and the command destruction determination that can be performed by the prefetching. There is no need to transmit to the lamp control means 113.

  Therefore, in the process of S795, when the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set, and the process of S796 described later is also skipped. Then, by shifting to the processing of S797, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transmission of the prefetch command to the sound lamp control device 113, and it is wasted between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. Can be suppressed. In addition, since it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to process the result of the pre-reading process for those for which the fluctuating effect has already been started, it is possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from being subjected to an excessive processing burden.

  It should be noted that whether or not the prefetch hold count stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k is 0 or a negative value is confirmed not only in the process of S795 but also in the processes of S787 to S795. Also good. If the prefetch hold count indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage and the process may proceed to S797.

  In the subsequent processing of S796, the pre-read execution flag 203j5 of the hold area (pre-read target hold area) corresponding to the pre-read hold count in the pre-read hold count storage area 203k is set to ON, and each counter C1 to C1 stored in the pre-read target hold area is set. A prefetch is made for the values of C3 and CS1, and the result of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination is predicted (S796). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the prefetching from being performed again on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 on which the prefetching has been performed.

  After the process of S796, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S797). This process is a process for detecting the case where the predicted state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the process of S794. If the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S797: Yes), there is a possibility that the prefetching performed previously including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the erroneous value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h. Since it means that the value is high, the process proceeds to S799, and the setting of the prediction state change command, the setting of turning on the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of all the reserved areas (the reserved first to fourth areas), and the like are executed.

  On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is OFF as a result of the process of S797 (S797: No), the process returns to the process of S785, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are again stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. A reserved area where prefetching has not been executed is extracted from each of the pending holding areas (S785), and it is determined whether there is a reserved area where prefetching has not been executed (S786). Then, in each of the reserved areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, the processes of S785 to S797 are repeatedly executed until there is no reserved area that has not been pre-read.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S786, if it is determined that there is no reserved area in which prefetching has not been executed in each of the reserved areas where the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved (S786: No), S785 to S797 The process repeats the process and proceeds to S798. In the process of S798, it is determined whether or not the predicted state change flag 203i is on (S797). This process is performed when the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) after the last process of S797 or immediately after the execution of the prefetch process (S701) is started. This is a process for detecting the case where the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON in the situation where the prefetching (the processes of S787 to S797) is not performed because there is no pending area that has not been prefetched.

  If the predicted state change flag 203i is not on but off (S798: No), the prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the prediction state change flag 203i is on (S798: Yes), as described above, the prefetching performed previously including the prefetching currently performed is performed based on the value of the prefetching probability change flag 203h that is incorrect. The process proceeds to S799.

  In the process of S799, the predicted state change command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S799). The predicted state change command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) when the timer interrupt process is executed next. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prediction state change command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets all the prediction results obtained by the prefetch processing stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time to be invalid. Thereby, it can suppress that various control by prefetching is performed based on an incorrect prediction result. For example, by performing command destruction determination based on an erroneous prediction result, it can be suppressed that the command is determined to be destroyed in the command destruction determination even though the command is not destroyed.

  In the processing of S795 or S798, if it is detected that the prediction state change flag 203i is set to ON by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) after the processing of S795, the processing of S795 is erroneously predicted. Since the prediction result based on the prefetch based on the gaming state that is likely to be present is set as the prefetch command, the prefetch command that is likely to indicate the erroneous prediction result is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 213. It will be. However, even if the prefetch command is transmitted, since the prediction state change command is set by the processing of S799 after the prefetch command, the prediction is performed later than the prefetch command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result. A state change command can be sent to the audio lamp controller 213. Therefore, it is possible to reliably invalidate the prediction result stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 based on a prefetch command that is likely to indicate an erroneous prediction result.

  Next, the prefetch execution flags 203j5 of all the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203j are set to OFF (S2701). As a result, it is indicated that the prefetching processing is not executed in all the reserved first to fourth areas. Therefore, in the prefetching processing to be executed next, the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j. The prefetching can be performed again on the value of CS1.

  Therefore, the prefetch processing is performed based on the correct prefetch probability change flag 203h value, that is, the correct gaming state that the pachinko machine 10 can take, with respect to the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j. It is possible to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls using more prediction results.

  After finishing the process of S2701, the prediction state change flag 203i is set to OFF (S2702), this prefetch process is complete | finished, and it returns to a main process.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetching process (S701) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 has been described. Similarly to the embodiment or the second embodiment, in the main process, the prefetch process may be executed within the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 milliseconds should be executed. Good. That is, the prefetch process may be performed at any timing after the negative determination is made in the process of S703 of the main process, the process of S704, S705, and S702 and then the process returns to the process of S703 again. . By executing the pre-reading process within the remaining period, in the start winning process (see FIG. 20), the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired along with the detection of the start winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. This can be determined earlier in the main process. Therefore, since the prediction of the result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern determination by the prefetching process can be performed earlier, it is less likely that the actual lottery is performed first based on each counter value of the prefetching target during the prefetching process. can do.

  In addition, when the prefetch process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process that is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the main process is executed as in the first or second embodiment. The processing of S703 may be omitted, and the processing of S701 to S705 may be repeatedly executed. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but since the execution time of the look-ahead process changes according to the state of the game, the timer interrupt process in which the update process of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C2 is performed For the execution interval (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment), the time for repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is not constant and varies. Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the variation time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. it can.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203j. In the main process (see FIG. 25), this prefetching process is executed regardless of the time interval at which the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation start process (see FIG. 22) is a process in the timer interruption process that is executed with priority over the main process, such as the big win lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect. ).

  Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, the prefetching is performed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the changing effect at the start of the changing effect. After processing, when the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect is performed, if the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the look-ahead at the start winning prize has been predicted, as described above, the game There is a risk that the game will be affected, for example, the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process in the game, is delayed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the prefetch process is executed in the main process, while the big hit lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is performed by one process of the timer interrupt process. It is comprised so that it may perform in a certain fluctuation start process (refer FIG. 22). Thereby, even if the prefetch process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is preferentially executed, so that the big win lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect. On the other hand, since the prefetch process is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed, the prefetch process can be completed with certainty. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the look-ahead process is performed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. It is possible to execute the game and predict the result of the jackpot lottery or the like, and to perform the jackpot lottery without delay at the execution start timing of the variation effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  Further, in this prefetching process, prefetching is executed for all the pending areas where the prefetching has not been executed among the pending areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are suspended in one prefetching process. The result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is predicted. As a result, prefetching can be executed more quickly than when prefetching is performed on any one of the reserved areas in one prefetching process. Therefore, it is possible to perform prefetching with respect to more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original big hit lottery is performed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203j at the start winning timing are directly read from the holding ball storage area 203j and pre-read, and the big hit lottery and the variation pattern A prefetching process for predicting the result of the determination is executed. As a result, the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect is reached during the prefetch process, and when the shift process is performed between the first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203j, the hold area during the prefetch process is shifted. However, an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. An effect can be produced.

  In the prefetch processing in the third embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched for one reserved area in order from the reserved area that has been reserved first among the reserved areas that have not been preread. (S787 to S796) The case has been described, but the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched in parallel from all the reserved areas that have not been prefetched and extracted by the processing of S785, and S787 to S796 are performed. A process corresponding to may be executed.

  In this case, in the process of S787, the number of hold times (the number of prefetch hold) of all the hold areas that have not been prefetched may be stored in the prefetch hold number storage area 203k for each hold area. For example, when prefetching has not been executed for the hold second area and the hold third area, the values “2” and “3” may be stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k.

  In the process of S796, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the reserved area may be set to ON for the reserved areas corresponding to all the prefetched pending counts stored in the prefetched pending count storage area 203k. For example, if the values “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, the prefetch execution flag 203j5 of the hold second area and the hold third area may be set to ON.

  Further, when a plurality of values are stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, the prefetches are simultaneously read in parallel with respect to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in all the hold areas corresponding to the plurality of values. Also good. For example, when the values “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch hold count storage area 203k, the prefetch of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold second area and the hold third area The prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the above may be performed simultaneously in parallel.

  In this case, for example, the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the reserved second area and the first per-number stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the reserved third area The random number counter C1 is read in advance (that is, the first per-random number counter C1 stored in all reserved areas that have not been pre-read), and then the process of reading the winning value of 1 from the ROM 202 and the read The process of comparing the winning value with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 of each reserved area is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first per-random number counter C1 of at least one reserved area is a big hit. You may do it.

  Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203j4 of the hold second area and the change type counter CS1 stored in the change type counter storage area 203j4 of the hold third area (that is, prefetching is not performed). A process of reading in advance the variation type counter CS1 stored in all the reserved areas for execution, and then reading the determination value for determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D; The process of comparing the read determination value with the value of the variation type counter CS1 of each reserved area is repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined for the variation type counter CS1 of at least one reserved area. It may be.

  Furthermore, in other prediction predictions based on prefetching, for example, prediction of jackpot type determination and prediction of stop type determination at the time of outage, as well as the determination of the variation pattern, from all the reserved areas where prefetching has not been executed. The process of reading the corresponding counter value in advance and then reading the determination value and the process of comparing the read determination value with the counter value of each holding area are performed by at least one holding area counter value. May be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed.

  As a result, it is not necessary to read the winning value or the judgment value separately for each holding area where the pre-reading has not been executed, and to predict the jackpot lottery or the determination of the variation pattern. , The number of readings of the winning value and the judgment value can be reduced, and the prefetching process can be speeded up.

  In this case, for example, after it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one reserved area is a big hit, only for the first assigned random number counter C1 of the remaining reserved areas that are not determined to be big hits. The prediction process for the big hit lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, after the prediction of one determination is completed for the counter value of at least one reserved area, the one determination is performed only for the counter values of the remaining reserved areas for which the prediction of determination is not completed. This prediction process may be executed continuously. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment is completed is not compared with the winning value or the judgment value, so that waste of processing can be omitted and the prefetching process can be further speeded up. Can do.

  On the other hand, for example, for the first per-random number counter C1 of all the reserved areas that have not been pre-read even after it is determined that the first per-random number counter C1 of at least one reserved area is a big hit, The prediction process of the big hit lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, even after the prediction of one determination is completed for the counter value of at least one reserved area, the determination of the one determination is performed for the counter values of all the reserved areas that have not been pre-read. You may make it perform a prediction process continuously. As a result, there is a possibility that processing may be wasteful, but it is unnecessary to determine whether the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of determination has been completed for any of the reserved areas and to change the reserved area used for the prediction. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity related to the control program due to the prefetching process.

  Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched in parallel from all the reserved areas where prefetching has not been executed, the value of the prefetch probability change flag 203h is set in the reserved area where prefetching has been executed. Among these, in order from the reserved area with the smallest area number, the pre-reading probability change flag is set in consideration of the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area. Good.

  At this time, based on the jackpot lottery result predicted by the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area having the smaller area number among the plurality of reserved areas, the setting of the prefetch probability change flag 203h is changed from off to on. Or when it is changed from off to on, the prefetch of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved area having a larger area number than the reserved area is based on the erroneous prefetch probability change flag 203h. Will be done. Therefore, in such a case, based on the value of the newly set prefetching probability change flag 203h, it is stored in the holding area having a larger area number than the holding area that has changed the setting of the prefetching probability change flag 203h. The prefetching of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 may be executed again. As a result, even when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched simultaneously from all the reserved areas where prefetching has not been executed, the counters C1 to C3 stored in all the reserved areas are read. The prefetching of the value of CS1 can be performed correctly.

  The “3rd symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the claims, and the “big hit” described in the above embodiments is the “predetermined game” described in the claims. The “variation pattern command” and the “stop type command” described in the above embodiment correspond to the “production control signal” described in the claims, and the “main processing” described in the above embodiment. Corresponds to the “first process” described in the claims, the “timer interrupt process” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second process”, and these “main process” and “timer interrupt process” MPU 201 corresponds to “first processing means” and “second processing means” described in the claims, and the “variation pattern” described in the above embodiment is the “variation” described in the claims. This corresponds to “dynamic display mode of effect”. In addition, the “holding first to fourth areas” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “storage area” described in the claims, and the “prefetch information zeroth to fourth areas” described in the above embodiments. Corresponding to the “determination storage area” described in the claims, the “prefetch information valid flag” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “valid information storage area” described in the claims. Further, the “continuous notice effect” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “suggest effect” described in the claims, and the “single notice effect” described in the above embodiment is the “first notice effect” described in the claims. Corresponds to “2 suggestion effect”.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination video RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the scan is performed during a blank period (scanning on a blank region that is a scan region other than the display region provided in the third symbol display device 81). The MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or the notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in the blank period, each video RAM 235, 236 You may judge that it is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is confirmed to determine whether or not it is not in use, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, when there is transfer data information that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information. Alternatively, the image data may be read out from the image data and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is predetermined so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. This is required for drawing a sprite when image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is shared by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the bus line 240 to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. You may connect and provide. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be provided connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

  By providing this bridge circuit, a character constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a using the existing image controller 237 or bus line 240 designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. A ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in each of the above embodiments, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at the time desired to be displayed. Can be made.

  In each of the embodiments described above, when the main process is started in the display control device 114, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, it is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In the above description, the boot program is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. It is not limited to this. For example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then the ROM controller 234b When it is detected that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c or is being set. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR ROM 234d and the boot program to be executed first after power-on is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 may incorporate a small-capacity ROM, and a boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on may be stored in the ROM. In this case, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c and corresponds to the designated address. Data (instruction code) to be read may be read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c, and then the address of the bus line 240 in the ROM controller 234b is “ When it is detected that “0000H” is designated, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  Here, since the built-in ROM can generally shorten the connection wiring, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. Accordingly, the wiring delay caused in signal propagation can be reduced, so that the data read time can be shortened. The built-in ROM can be designed with any data bus width according to individual hardware specifications. If the data bus width is set wide, a large amount of data can be read at once. It is. Therefore, if the boot program is stored in such a built-in ROM, the boot program that is first executed after power-on in the MPU 231 is read from the built-in ROM at a high speed, set in the buffer RAM 634c, and from the set program. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the address designated on the bus line 240 can be output to the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Further, instead of storing the boot program to be executed first after power-on in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the character ROM 234 or the built-in ROM of the ROM controller 234b, the boot program is provided outside the character ROM 234 and connected to the bus line 240. A boot program to be executed first after power-on may be stored in a very small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) NOR-type ROM. In this case, in the NOR type ROM outside the character ROM 234 connected to the bus line 240, the address specified for the bus line 240 by the MPU 231 corresponds to a part of the boot program to be executed first after the MPU 231 cancels the system reset. When an address (for example, “0000H” to “0400H”) is detected, data (instruction code) corresponding to the address is read from the first program storage area 735a and output to the MPU 231. May be. Further, the ROM controller 234b may be configured so that the data output of the character ROM 734 at this time is in a high impedance state.

  Here, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR-type ROM having an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) provided outside the character ROM 234 and connected to the bus line 240. In addition, by storing a part of the boot program to be executed first after the MPU 231 cancels the system reset, the part of the boot program is read from the NOR ROM at a high speed and output to the MPU 231. be able to. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can immediately fetch the instruction code of the boot program read at high speed, the main process can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, since the NOR-type ROM is connected to the bus line 240, the number of parts increases as compared with the above embodiments. This NOR-type ROM is the first boot that the MPU 231 should execute after releasing the system reset. It is provided for storing a part of the program, and its capacity can be very small as described above. Therefore, an increase in cost due to provision of the NOR type ROM can be reduced.

  In this case, as a memory that is provided outside the character RAM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240 and stores a boot program to be executed first after power-on, it is faster than the NAND flash memory 234a instead of the NOR ROM. Alternatively, a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation may be used. For example, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoretic RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM) may be used as such a memory.

  In addition, all control programs including a boot program to be executed first after power-on are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM 234, and the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115. Then, a boot program to be executed first after turning on the power stored in the NAND flash memory 234a is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and then it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”. Then, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  As a result, at the stage where the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231 on the bus line 240, a process for reading a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234 a has been started, or a part of the boot program has already been started. Is set in the buffer RAM 534c. Therefore, if a part of the boot program is already set in the buffer RAM 234c when the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” on the bus line 240 in response to the release of the system reset, the character ROM 234 stores the data (command) in the designated address. Code) can be immediately read from the buffer RAM 234c. Further, even when a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 234c when the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” on the bus line 240, a part of the boot program has already been read from the NAND flash memory 234a. Read processing has started. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the address “0000H” in the bus line 240 as compared with the case where the reading of a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234a is started in response to the designation of the address “0000H” in the bus line 240. ", The character ROM 234 sets a part of the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c, and shortens the time until the data (instruction code) at the specified address is output from the buffer RAM 234c to the MPU 231. Can do. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 214 composed of the NAND flash memory 214a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b designates directly from the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read and output to the MPU 181 via the bus line 240. Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR-type ROM 234d and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234d1, and the MPU 234 releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. You may provide it by connecting directly to. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the display control of the resident video RAM 235 is controlled even if the existing image controller 237 or the bus line 240 is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The device 114 can be easily provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more The video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. A port type RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. The same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. It may be transferred. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are not overwritten and kept while being turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control unit 110 or the sound lamp control device is not necessarily limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from 113. Also good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is checked before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Thus, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the main processing is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. Can prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and can reduce the time required for power recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the bus line 240. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, it is affected by the bus line 240 that frequently exchanges data signals. Without being transferred efficiently.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on variation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. . The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the player operates the frame button 22, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or frame is displayed by the display control device 114. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of super reach are changed based on the button operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reaching effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new sub-area in which the original back image is stored is newly added to the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a back image is stored, or in a different area from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described. The main control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114 and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. If a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 42). May be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 44B). In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor may It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. If an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or the occurrence of a magnetic field error is grasped based on an output signal from the magnet sensor (that is, an error occurrence flag) Display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 (when the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error is set on). Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the drawing content for adding and displaying the continuous notice effect that is not normally displayed in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the additional data table. The additional data table is not limited to the above, and the additional data table may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing content for drawing the effect may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. In addition to prescribing or in addition to prescribing such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change part or all of the tone of the one production or display in one production The drawing content necessary for changing the displayed image to be displayed may be predetermined.

  In the case where the additional data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing part or all of the color tone in one production, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite whose color tone is changed at that time, and color information specifying the changed color tone of that sprite. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. Color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the additional data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the additional data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the effect (for example, the continuous notice effect) that is additionally displayed is displayed. Although the case where the additional data table defining the drawing contents is set and the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is acquired from each data table has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the base effect ( For example, when the display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is displayed in addition to the variable effect is determined, the display is added to the display data table corresponding to the base effect. A new display data table is created by adding the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be displayed to each address indicating the display time. It generates, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. Thereby, it is possible to easily display an effect that is displayed in addition to the effect that is the base. In addition, for each type of the base effect, a display data table that defines the rendering contents of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content that overlaps the effect displayed in addition to the base effect Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing contents can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for the specification is compared with the case where the drawing contents are specified from the display data table and the additional data table. Can be lightened.

  If it is determined that an effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect is to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is, and the drawing content of the image is acquired. May be.

  In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the rendering content additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) is additionally displayed. If it is described in a form that clearly shows the rendering content of the production, and the additional production is displayed, it is displayed in addition to the rendering content of the base production. If the rendering content of the effect is specified from the display data table and the effect that is additionally displayed is not displayed, the rendering content that is additionally displayed is discarded, and the effect that becomes the base Only the drawing contents may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that prescribes the rendering content to be additionally displayed. This eliminates the need for control of the additional data table, thereby reducing the processing load.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. In addition, an additional transfer data table that is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. May be. This additional transfer data table is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or display data table), and the sprite to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table Apart from the corresponding transfer data table, an additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, if the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table for addition set in the transfer data table buffer for addition, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. It may be. Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using an additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to the sprite used in the display data table corresponding to the display data table, and performs a predetermined display. Although the case where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f in accordance with the setting of the data table in the display data table buffer 233d has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When a predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. New display data It generates Buru, based on the new display data tables, may be acquired and drawing contents and transfer data information of the image simultaneously. As a result, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table, so that the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

  Further, when the above-described transfer data table for addition that is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared, when a predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table is stored in the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time, a new additional data table is generated, and an image is generated based on the new additional data table. The drawing content and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and the transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In addition, when display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is displayed in addition to an effect (for example, a variable effect) is determined, a display data table corresponding to the effect that becomes the base is displayed. On the other hand, the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed are added for each address indicating the display time, and a new display data table is generated. Based on the new display data table In addition, when acquiring the drawing contents of the image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is additionally written for each address indicating the display time, with respect to the display data table, The transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table is added for each address indicating the display time. Te, it may generate a new display data table. As a result, the display data table can be used to specify the rendering content of the base effect, the rendering content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for those renderings. Compared with the case where drawing contents and transfer data information are specified from the table, transfer data table, additional data table, and transfer data table for addition, respectively, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  Further, the transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. This also allows the drawing content and transfer data information to be specified using the display data table, so compared to the case where the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the rendering content additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) is additionally displayed. When the content is described in a format that clearly indicates the rendering content of the effect, the display data table is used not only for the transfer data information used for the base effect but also for the rendering of the effect that is additionally displayed. The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect that is additionally displayed, and it is a base for displaying the effect that is additionally displayed. The drawing contents and transfer data information of the effect, and the drawing contents and transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed are specified from the display data table and added. When the displayed effect is not displayed, the drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed and the transfer data information thereof are discarded, and only the rendering contents and the transfer data information of the base effect are displayed in the display data table. You may specify from. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering contents and transfer data information of the base effect and the rendering contents and transfer data information of the effect to be added using the display data table. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. In this example, only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the user is specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An additional data table may be prepared, and an additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Further, the drawing contents defined in the additional data table corresponding to the selected super reach may be additionally written in the display data table. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233g to specify the drawing contents and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame on which a drawn image is to be developed. Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the confirmed display effect ends, the main control device 110 is connected via the audio lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, it is also possible to set a final display data table corresponding to the final display effect in the display data table buffer 233d. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first obtains the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power source. After the transfer is completed, the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after turning on the power, first, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered at that time (rendering content) The case of defining image data information (transfer data information) to be transferred in time has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself as a sprite type to be drawn that is defined every predetermined time interval. The address of the character ROM 234 may be specified. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In each of the above embodiments, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image discrimination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. You may let them. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the plurality of back images has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in part or all of the super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may be. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Also good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be such that it moves or changes in size or shape.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed in the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has been described. A 4th symbol display device is provided separately from the variation effect executed by the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the 4th symbol is displayed on the 4th symbol display device to execute the continuous notice effect. Also good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Because the continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, off) after the end of the continuous notice effect. Also good.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, the case where an image for continuous notice effect different from the change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous notice effect is performed has been described. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is finished. In this case, in the continuous notice command processing (see FIG. 40A) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other The stop symbol discrimination flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so that the chance eye is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance item can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the “jellyfish” image is always displayed as the image of the continuous notice effect, but a plurality of images may be prepared as the images of the continuous notice effect. In this case, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined which image is used to execute the continuous notice effect. Further, according to each image, the probability of winning a big hit may be changed when the continuous notice effect related to the image is performed. For example, a “bubble” image and a “jellyfish” image are prepared as images of a continuous notice effect, and the probability of a big hit when a continuous notice effect is performed by the “jellyfish” image is a continuous notice by the “bubble” image. You may prescribe | regulate the continuous notice determination probability in a continuous notice determination table so that it may become higher than the probability which becomes a big hit when an effect is performed.

  In addition, when a plurality of images are prepared as the images of the continuous notice effect, the images may be selected and displayed from all or some of the plurality of images as the images of the single notice effect. Alternatively, only one image of a plurality of images may be displayed as the single announcement effect image.

  In each of the above embodiments, the continuous notice effect is a single image (“jellyfish” image) displayed over a plurality of variable effects, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A different image may be displayed. The different images are preferably images that are related to each other. For example, the continuous notice effect displays “egg” for the first change effect and “chick” for the second change effect among the multiple change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. The “chicken” may be displayed for the third variation effect, and the “chicken group” may be displayed for the fourth variation effect (the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set). . Also, if the number of variable effects set for the continuous notice effect is three or less, even if the variable effect is the second or third variable effect after the start of the continuous notice effect, it is the continuous notice effect. If the last variation effect is set, “chicken group” may be displayed.

  Alternatively, the continuous notice effect is displayed for a plurality of variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set, while displaying the “jellyfish” image, and for each variable effect, the remaining number of changes until the continuous notice effect ends. You may make it display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 which shows whether an effect is performed.

  As a result, the symbol displayed in the continuous notice effect changes gradually (steps up) every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By seeing, a group of chickens was displayed in the variation effect, or the display that the number of variation effects to be executed before the end of the continuous notice effect with the “Jellyfish” image was zero was displayed. In this case, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation production.

  In the embodiment described above, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is managed by the continuous judgment information stored in the continuous notice execution counter 223e and the continuous judgment information storage area provided in the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas. Each time a variation effect for which a continuous notice effect is set is executed, how many times the variable effect is executed after the start of the continuous notice effect, or how many times the remaining effect until the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be easily grasped. Therefore, even if the continuous notice effect is composed of different images, it is possible to easily grasp which image should be displayed in each variation effect.

  Further, when the continuous notice effect is to display different images over a plurality of variable effects, any one of the different images (for example, an image always displayed at the beginning of the continuous notice effect) is used as the single notice effect image. Alternatively, an image displayed at the end of the continuous notice effect may be displayed, or may be displayed by selecting from all or a part of different images.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110, based on information on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the look-ahead command, uses one of the conditions that the information is a 15R probability variation jackpot or is out of front and back. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined including the case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R normal jackpot, as well as the 15R probability variation jackpot and out of front and back. In addition, in the information on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, information indicating that the prediction result is a non-front / rear out of front / rear out of the front / rear, and the execution of the continuous notice effect including the case of out of front / back is included. You may decide. In addition to or instead of the 15R probability variation jackpot, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached. Further, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined in consideration of the information regarding the prediction result of the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command. For example, the execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when the prediction result of the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command is super reach or special reach. Also, if the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern is special reach, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined and the continuous notice effect is executed only when the result of the big hit lottery is 15R probability variable big success. In the case where the last variation effect for which is set to be developed into special reach, it may be a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 100%. Thus, the conditions for determining the execution of the continuous notice effect may be set as appropriate in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 10.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, after the continuous notice effect is completed, an image related to the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one variation effect. After the effect is finished, images related to the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous effect for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, three times, etc.). It may be configured. Thereby, since the interval at which the continuous notice effect is executed can be widened, the value of the player regarding the continuous notice effect can be increased as compared with the case where the continuous notice effect is continuously generated.

  In the first embodiment, after the continuous notice effect is completed, the image related to the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous variation effect for X times. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, in the process of S1042 (see FIG. 32), a value obtained by adding X to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e. It may be. Then, when the variable effect is started, in the processing of S1114 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution counter 223e is larger than X. If the value is larger than X, the continuous notice execution flag is turned on. Further, 1 may be subtracted from the continuous notice effect counter 223e. In the process of S1117 (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution counter 223e is in the range of 1 to X, and if the value is in the range of 1 to X, the continuous notice execution flag is set. 1 may be subtracted from the value of the continuous notice execution counter 223e. As described above, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, if the value obtained by adding X to the number of variable effects for executing the continuous notice effect is set in the continuous notice execution counter 223e, the continuous notice effect can be easily obtained. After the end, it is possible to configure so that images related to the continuous notice effect or the single notice effect are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous X effects.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the continuous notice effect is completed, the images related to the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect in the variable effect of X times (in this case, X = 1 to 4 in this case). Is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the information (value) in the continuous determination information storage area of the pre-reading information 0th area is 1, for the last variation effect in the continuous notice effect When the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, all the continuous avoidance flags in the prefetch information first area to the prefetch information X area may be set to ON in the processing of S1134 (see FIG. 55). . Thus, it is possible to easily configure the third symbol display device 81 so that images related to the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are not displayed in the continuous variation effect for X times after the continuous notice effect is finished.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 110 prefetches the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and predicts the results of jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, and then information on the number of prefetch suspensions and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery Although a case has been described where a prefetch command including information related to information and information related to the prediction result of variation pattern determination is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in addition to jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, or in place of at least one of jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination, predict the result of, for example, stop type determination, etc. A prefetch command including information related to the prediction result may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 may set the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the information regarding the prediction result included in the prefetch command. In addition, the prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and each time a variation pattern command is received, the prefetch is performed while shifting between the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. Determine whether the prediction result by prefetch stored in the information 0 area matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and determine the destruction of the command. Also good. Thus, by appropriately setting the prediction result to be included in the prefetch command, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform various controls based on the prefetch.

  Further, main controller 110 may transmit the pre-read value to each of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as it is in the pre-read command together with information related to the pre-read hold count and transmit it to voice lamp control device 113. The type of counter included in the prefetch hold command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counters. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 stores various tables used in the big hit lottery and variation pattern determination of the main control device 110 in the ROM 222, and when receiving the prefetch command, the jackpot lottery is performed based on the various tables. The result or the result of the variation pattern discrimination may be predicted. And based on the prediction result, you may set execution of a continuous notice effect. The prediction result is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and every time a variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information zeroth area is shifted between the prefetch information zeroth to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. It is also possible to determine whether or not the command is destroyed by determining whether or not the prediction result based on the prefetch stored in the table matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the prefetch hold command are stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b as they are, and the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b are received each time a variation pattern command is received. The result of jackpot lottery or the result of variation pattern discrimination may be predicted from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-read information 0th area. Then, the destruction of the command may be determined by determining whether the prediction result matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. By including the values of various counters in the pre-read command, the sound lamp control device 113 can predict the results of various determinations performed by the main control device 110 from the values of these counters. On the other hand, the degree of freedom of control based on prefetching can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a continuous notice command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control apparatus 114, the display control apparatus 114 corresponds to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command. The case where the transfer instruction is performed so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes the same notice type continuous notice effect. In this case, after the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect ends. It may be controlled as follows. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, when the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also its step A transfer instruction may be made so that the image data corresponding to all the continuous notice image types used in the up-type continuous notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous preview image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous preview effect is ended. Also good. This ensures that the image data can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect. Further, it is possible to suppress the same image data from being transferred repeatedly.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1020) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the changing effect is set. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the continuous notice command is used to notify the display controller 114 of the continuous notice image type and the continuous notice image type has been described. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation pattern command for display is generated (S1106), it is determined whether or not a continuous notice effect is to be performed. When a notice effect is performed, information regarding the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, from the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In addition to instructing transfer to the normal video RAM 236, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, or the display for change corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command The contents of the additional data table may be added to the data table, a new display data table may be generated, and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Alternatively, when additional drawing information for a plurality of continuous notice image types is described in advance in the display data table for change, a display change pattern command including information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image is received. Then, by setting the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type to ON, the additional drawing corresponding to the continuous notice image type is displayed from the display data table corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command. The contents may be specified. Thereby, since the number of commands is reduced, the processing can be simplified.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. That is, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to one variation pattern and a drawing content of a continuous notice effect corresponding to one continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is the sound lamp control based on the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 (front / rear outreach, front / rear out reach, complete outreach). Although the case where it is set by the device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been put on hold is determined. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear detach reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in the effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each variation. In this case, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Further, the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1106 in FIG. 33) changes the variation pattern according to the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In a situation where execution of the notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one first entrance 64 for starting the jackpot lottery is entered in the game board 13 when entering the game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances at which entrances are detected independently and a lottery lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are arranged in the game board 13, prefetching may be executed on the counter value reserved at each first entrance. In this case, the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 may include information indicating which of the first entrances is prefetching for the hold. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Furthermore, in the sound lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area may be prepared for each first entrance. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process is performed on the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the first entrance that detected the start prize that triggered the variation presentation indicated by the variation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine the correspondence between the variation effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern discrimination predicted by prefetching the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the destruction of the command.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrance holes are provided, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the pre-read command, and then enters the first entrance where there has been a start prize. Regardless, the continuous notice effect may be executed over all of the fluctuating effects (holding balls) that are reserved at that time. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and a variation effect for winning a prize at one first entrance is preferentially executed over a change effect for winnings at another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only from the prefetch result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the first entrance where the change effect is preferentially executed. . Thereby, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not started for this variable effect. . If the continuous notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with a high priority, There is a risk that the continuous notice effect will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modified example, the presence / absence of the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variation effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, Since the continuous notice effect is not started, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 33). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S311). A reserved ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 21). It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. In this case, S1108 in FIG. 33 is omitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the pre-read command is received in the sound lamp control device 113, the number of variable effects previously held is determined from the pre-read hold count included in the pre-read command, and then notified by the pre-read command. Although the case where it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for all the variable effects previously held from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the change pattern determination to be performed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each of the variable effects previously suspended. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the variation display process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and a counter is provided for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. May be. In the variation display process, when performing the continuous notice effect (S1110: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. A continuous notice command may be set (S1111). In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the prefetch hold count included in the prefetch command when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effects, whether or not to start the continuous notice effect The prediction result of jackpot lottery or variation pattern discrimination included in the prefetch command when determining whether or not, the variation pattern of individual variation effects in which the continuous notice effect is executed, or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In each of the embodiments described above, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, it sets execution of a continuous notice effect based on the prefetch command, or predicts a jackpot lottery or fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch command. Every time a change pattern command is received and stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, the above-mentioned shift processing is executed between the prefetch information 0th to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b and the prefetch information 0th area. A case has been described in which various controls such as command destruction determination are executed based on various prediction results based on prefetching stored in. On the other hand, some or all of the various controls based on prefetching may be performed by the display control device 114 instead of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display prefetch command including a part or all of the information included in the prefetch command and transmits the display prefetch command to the display control device 114. Also good. Further, the main control device 110 may directly transmit a prefetch command to the display control device 114. Further, the prefetch command or the display prefetch command transmitted to the display control device 114 may include various counter values instead of the prediction results of various determinations.

  On the other hand, in the display control device 114, based on the information included in the prefetch command or the prefetch command for display, after grasping the number of variation effects previously suspended from the number of prefetch hold, from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, It may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for all the variable effects previously held. In this case, a continuous notice lottery counter 223c provided in the character ROM 234 of the display controller 114 is provided corresponding to the continuous notice determination table 222a provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113 in the first embodiment, and the RAM 223 is provided. By providing the work RAM 233 with items corresponding to the single notice lottery counter 223d, the continuous notice execution counter 223e, and the single notice execution flag 223f, the display controller 114 sets the execution of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect. You may do it. Alternatively, an equivalent to the continuous notice determination table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113 in the second embodiment is provided in the character ROM 234 of the display controller 114, and a continuous notice lottery counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 is provided. By providing the work RAM 233 with items corresponding to the notice lottery counter 223d, the one-shot notice execution flag 223f, and the pre-read information storage area 223g, the display control device 114 is set to execute continuous notice effects or to set one-shot notice effects. It may be. When various counter values are included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command, the main controller 110 stores a table used for the big win lottery or various determinations in the ROM or the like of the display controller 114, and then the display controller. In step 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command. And when performing a continuous notice effect, the display control apparatus 114 may determine the aspect of the continuous notice effect. Here, when the mode of the continuous notice effect is determined, the transfer data information may be included in the drawing list so that the image data of the continuous notice effect of the form is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thereafter, each time a display variation pattern command is received, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the set mode is added so that the continuous notice effect is performed for the change effect corresponding to the number of pre-reading suspensions. You may make it set to the buffer 233e.

  Further, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with an equivalent to the prefetch information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9), and when a prefetch command or a display prefetch command is received, the prefetch provided in the prefetch information storage area is provided. Of the information first to fourth areas, various prediction results or various counter values such as jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command may be stored in an area corresponding to the prefetch hold count of the prefetch command. Every time the display variation pattern command is received, a shift process similar to the shift process performed by the sound lamp control device 113 is executed between the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas, and the pre-read information 0th area. Various controls may be executed in accordance with various prediction results or various counter values based on the prefetch stored in. For example, various prediction results based on the prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0th area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on the prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0th area The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received display variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the received display stop type command. When various counter values are included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command, the main controller 110 stores a table used for the big win lottery or various determinations in the ROM or the like of the display controller 114, and then the display controller. In step 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as a single control device, when the pre-read command is received by the single control device, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the information included in the pre-read command. It may be set. In this case, a ROM corresponding to the continuous notice determination table 222a is provided in a ROM included in one control device, and a continuous notice lottery counter 223c, a single notice lottery counter 223d, a continuous notice execution counter 223e, By providing the one corresponding to the single notice execution flag 223f, setting of execution of the continuous notice effect or setting of the single notice effect may be performed by the one control device. Alternatively, a ROM corresponding to the continuous notice determination table 222b is provided in a ROM included in one control device, and a continuous notice lottery counter 223c, a single notice lottery counter 223d, a single notice execution flag 223f, and prefetching are provided in a RAM included in one control apparatus. By providing something corresponding to the information storage area 223g, the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect or the setting of the single notice effect may be performed by the one control device. In addition, the RAM included in the one control device is provided with an equivalent of the prefetch information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9), and when a prefetch command is received, the prefetch information first to first information provided in the prefetch information storage area is provided. Of the fourth area, various prediction results or various counter values such as jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command may be stored in an area corresponding to the number of prefetch suspensions of the prefetch command. Each time a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the same shift processing as in the above embodiments is executed between the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas, and the pre-read information stored in the pre-read information 0th area. Various controls may be executed according to various prediction results based on the above or various counter values. For example, various prediction results based on the prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0th area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern discrimination predicted from various counter values based on the prefetch stored in the prefetch information 0th area The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the received stop type command.

  Further, when the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice command and an error occurrence command, Various flags such as a continuous notice flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and based on the flags, a display data table, a transfer data table, and an additional data table are displayed as a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233f, an additional data table buffer 233e, or It may be set in the composite data table buffer 451d, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or necessary image data transfer instructions may be set.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, it has been configured such that the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passage through the second entrance 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to 4 times. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a variation effect performed by the display means. The means includes a detection means for detecting establishment of the start condition and start information acquired when the start condition is detected by the detection means until a lottery based on the start information is performed. , A lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start-up information that is acquired first and stored in the memory means, and a lottery thereof. A generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, a first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means Information for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal based on the start information used for the lottery and the determination means Second output means for outputting to the sub-control means, the sub-control means controls the display means to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, Various controls are executed based on information relating to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, and the main control means repeatedly executes the first process after the power is turned on. And a second processing unit that periodically executes the second process at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first process by an interrupt, and the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit includes: The gaming machine A1 is performed in a first process executed by the first processing means, and the lottery by the lottery means is performed in a second process executed by the second processing means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the start information acquired along with the establishment of the start condition is lottery based on the start information. In the meantime, the predetermined number is stored in the storage means as the upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery means performs lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The production control signal generated by the generation means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Further, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is judged by the judgment means based on the start information used for the lottery, Information relating to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. The sub-control means controls the display means to perform the changing effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, and performs various controls based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. Execute. Here, the main control means includes a first processing means for repeatedly executing the first process after the power is turned on, and a second process for periodically executing the second process at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first process by interruption. The lottery content is determined by the determination means in the first process executed by the first processing means, and the lottery by the lottery means is executed by the second processing means. It is configured to be performed in the second process. As a result, even when the lottery content used to generate one production control signal is being determined during the first process, the second process is prioritized over the first process after a predetermined time has elapsed. In the second process, the lottery for generating another effect control signal can be performed in the second process when the variable effect is started by the display means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the lottery for causing the display means to display the fluctuating effect that can trigger the player to give a predetermined game value is delayed as the lottery content is determined. On the other hand, since the determination of the lottery content is performed again in the first process after the completion of the second process, another effect control signal is generated during the determination of the lottery content used to generate one effect control signal. Even if the lottery is performed, the determination of the lottery content can be completed without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of normally performing main control of the game while performing various controls by determining the lottery content.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the main control means outputs information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the main control means uses the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Waiting number acquisition means for acquiring the number of waiting times until the lottery is performed, and the second output means includes the number of waiting times acquired by the waiting number acquisition means together with information relating to determination of the lottery content by the determination means. A gaming machine A2 that outputs to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the main control means outputs information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means However, the standby number acquired by the standby number acquisition unit together with the information related to the determination of the lottery contents by the determination unit is output to the sub-control unit by the second output unit. As a result, the sub-control means actually performs the lottery based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content has been performed, and sets the number of standby times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result. Various controls can be executed in consideration. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the main control means uses the reliability determination means for determining whether the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low and the reliability determination means, A gaming machine A3, comprising: notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the result of the lottery content determined by the determination means is low.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the main control means, the reliability judgment means judges that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously judged by the judgment means is low. Since the notification means notifies the sub-control means to that effect, after receiving the notification, the sub-control means performs various controls based on information relating to the determination of the lottery content with low reliability. This can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent various controls based on the erroneous determination of the lottery content, so that more reliable control can be provided by the player.

  In the gaming machine A3, the reliability determination means is the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means when the lottery probability for obtaining a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed. It is determined that the reliability of the gaming machine A4 is low.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3, when the lottery probability that obtains a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed, the reliability judgment means previously determines Since it is determined that the result of the lottery content determined by the means is low in reliability, even if the determination means cannot correctly determine that the lottery probability set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed. Based on the determination of the lottery contents, it is possible to suppress frequent various controls. Therefore, more reliable control can be provided by the player.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the determination means determines that the reliability is low when the reliability determination means determines that the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by re-determining the result of the selected lottery content.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the determination means is determined by the reliability determination means that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low. Is configured to re-determine the results of the lottery contents determined to be low in reliability, so the sub-control means executes more various controls using more judgment results of the lottery contents. can do.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the determination means outputs the effect as the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. It is characterized in that, based on starting information used for the lottery, the lottery content indicating whether to give a predetermined game value to the player after the variable effect performed based on the control signal is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, after the variable production performed based on the production control signal is stopped and displayed as the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the production control signal. The lottery content as to whether or not to give a predetermined game value to the player is determined by the determination means based on the starting information used for the lottery. Thereby, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of whether or not a predetermined game value is given after the variation effect is displayed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the determination means outputs the effect as the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that the lottery content relating to the dynamic display mode of the fluctuating effects performed based on the control signal is determined based on the start information used for the lottery.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, before the production control signal is output by the first output unit, the lottery content by the lottery unit used to generate the production control signal is related to the dynamic display mode of the variable production performed based on the production control signal. The contents of the lottery are determined by the determination means based on the start information used for the lottery. Thereby, in the sub-control means, various controls can be executed in consideration of the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, more various controls can be performed in the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sub-control unit is configured to perform a part until the variation effect in which the determination is performed is performed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit. Or the game machine A8 characterized by including an effect setting means for setting the same or related effects for all the changing effects.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, in the sub-control means, based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, for some or all of the variable effects until the changed effect is performed, The same or related effects are set by the effect setting means. Thereby, when the same or related effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects, the lottery contents performed for the variation effects performed after the effect can be suggested to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some game value is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the sub-control unit is configured to select the lottery unit based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content. Corresponding determination means for determining whether the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means based on the lottery result and output from the first output means is appropriate, and corresponding determination If it is determined by the means that the information related to the determination of the lottery content and the content of the effect control signal are incompatible, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is specially selected. A game machine A9 comprising a mode change means for changing to a specific mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, the sub-control means performs lottery by the lottery means based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and based on the lottery result The corresponding determining means determines whether the content of the effect control signal generated by the generating means and output from the first output means is appropriate. And when it is judged that they are unsuitable, the dynamic display mode of the change production performed based on the production control signal is changed into a special mode by the mode change means. Here, the lottery means performs lottery based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and the contents of the effect control signal generated by the generating means based on the lottery result Is not suitable, there is a possibility that the sub-control means has not correctly received various signals from the main control means. In such a state, if a variation effect is performed according to the effect control signal, there is a risk that the player will be given a game result that is different from the expectation that the player has had due to the variation effect. There is a risk of distrust. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in such a case, since the fluctuating effect is performed in a special manner, it is possible to suppress the player from having a different sense of expectation from the actual lottery result. The game can be continued with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control unit stores start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied and stored in the storage unit separately from the storage unit. The determination means uses the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal for the lottery before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the determination is based on the start information stored in the second storage means as the start information to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the start information acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is established is stored in the second storage means separately from the storage means. Then, before the production control signal is output by the first output unit, the determination unit stores the lottery content by the lottery unit used for generating the production control signal in the second storage unit as start information used for the lottery. It is configured to make a determination based on the started information. Thereby, even if the storage state of the one or more start information stored in the storage unit is changed based on the fact that the lottery unit performs the lottery, for example, one or more of the storage unit in the storage unit along with the lottery by the lottery unit Even when the storage areas of the start information are changed, the determination means can determine the lottery contents using the start information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when a lottery for generating another production control signal is performed during the determination of the lottery content used to generate one production control signal, the start information used for the determination of the lottery content can be easily read out. .

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means is a second storage state instruction means that indicates whether or not the second storage means stores start information indicating that the determination by the determination means is not complete. And the second storage state instruction means when storing the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied with respect to the second storage means and stored in the storage means. State setting means for setting the storage state of start information in the second storage means shown to a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored, the determination means comprising: The storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instructing means is a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. In this case, based on the start information stored in the second storage means, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the production control signal is displayed. A gaming machine B2 that is to be determined.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the second storage state instruction means indicates whether or not the second storage means stores start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. Further, when storing the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is established with respect to the second storage means and stored in the storage means, the state setting means causes the second storage state instruction means to The starting information storage state in the second storage means shown is set to a state in which starting information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determining means has not been completed is stored. When the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, Based on the start information stored in the second storage unit, the determination unit determines the lottery content by the lottery unit used for generating the production control signal before the production control signal is output by the first output unit. The Thus, when the start information is stored in the second storage means, the determination means stores the start information in which the determination state of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed. It can be easily determined that the determination of the lottery content based on the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete has been completed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the main control means determines that the start information storage state in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine B3 comprising second storage control means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is the state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. In some cases, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the start information that has not been determined by the determination means already stored in the second storage means from being overwritten by the newly acquired start information. In particular, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously performed by suppressing overwriting by the newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control means also stores start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and stored in the storage means in the second storage means. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the storage means, The waiting number subtraction means for subtracting 1 from the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means, and information relating to the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means A standby number acquisition means for acquiring the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means when outputting to the sub-control means, wherein the second output means is a lottery by the determination means Gaming machine B4, characterized by outputting the standby number acquired by the standby number obtaining unit along with information about the determination of volume to the secondary control unit.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, when the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is established and stored in the storage means is also stored in the second storage means, the start stored in the storage means Based on the information, the number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery is stored in the standby number storage means. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means is decremented by one by the waiting number subtraction means. Thereby, since the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the number of waiting times is reduced by 1 accurately, the same start information as the start information stored in the second storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. Based on the above, the number of waiting times until the lottery means performs the lottery can always be accurately stored in the waiting number storage means. Then, when the information related to the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the standby count stored in the standby count storage means is the standby count. Acquired by the acquisition unit, the second output unit is configured to output the standby number acquired by the standby number acquisition unit to the sub-control unit together with information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit. As a result, even if the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means, the sub-control means is stored together with the information related to the determination of the lottery content. Based on the same start information used for determining the lottery content among the start information stored in the means, it is possible to accurately notify the number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of standby times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main control unit includes a standby number determination unit that determines whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit includes the standby number determination unit by the standby number determination unit. When it is determined that the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less, the information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means B5 .

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the standby number determination unit whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage unit is 0 or less. The fact that the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less is determined by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information stored in the second storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. It means that the number of standby times until the lottery is performed is 0 or less, that is, the lottery means has performed the lottery based on the starting information. Therefore, the waiting number determination means determines whether the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less, and among the starting information stored in the storage means, the starting information stored in the second storage means and Based on the same starting information, it can be determined that the lottery by the lottery means has been performed. Here, before the information related to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control unit based on the start information stored in the second storage unit, the lottery content is determined from the start information stored in the storage unit. If a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as that used, and if the lottery result is output to the sub-control means, then it means that information relating to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means May not be made. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, when the waiting number stored in the waiting number storing unit is determined to be 0 or less by the waiting number determining unit, the second output unit Information relating to the determination is not output to the sub-control means. Thus, before the information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is output to the sub-control unit, the start information stored in the storage unit is based on the same start information used for the determination of the lottery content. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means, it can be suppressed that the result related to the determination of the lottery content for the lottery is output to the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control unit stores start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied and stored in the storage unit separately from the storage unit. When the start condition is detected by the second storage means and the third storage means and the detection means, the determination means determines whether or not the lottery content has been selected from the second storage means and the third storage means. Storage control means for storing the start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied is stored in any one of the incomplete start information stored, and the determination means is a lottery content by the determination means. On the basis of the starting information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start winning that is not completed is determined, an effect control signal is output by the first output means. Gaming machine C1 to before being force, characterized in that to determine the drawing contents by said selecting means to be used in generating 該演 output control signal.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means includes the second storage means and the third storage means for storing the start information acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is established, separately from the storage means. Is provided. When the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means, one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start prize for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is not stored. The start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied is stored by the storage control means. Here, since the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is executed in the first process, the second process is periodically executed at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first process. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is often interrupted with the execution of the second process. Therefore, it may take time to determine the lottery content. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, even when the start winning condition is detected, even if a start prize for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not completed is stored in the second storage means, Since newly acquired start information can be stored in the third storage means, more start information can be stored in the second storage means or the third storage means. The determination means outputs an effect control signal from the first output means based on the start information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start prize for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored. Before being performed, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined. Therefore, since the lottery content is determined for more starting information, the sub-control means can execute more various controls.

  In the gaming machine C1, the determination means stores the start prize when both of the second storage means and the third storage means have not completed determination of the lottery content by the determination means. For each of the start information stored in the start information stored in the second storage means and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage means, the first information is based on the start information. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined before the production control signal is output by the output means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the start winning that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored in both the second storage means and the third storage means, the start information stored in the second storage means For each of the stored start information and the start information stored in the start information stored in the third storage means, based on the start information, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, The lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is judged by the judgment means. Accordingly, if two pieces of start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete are stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, the determination of the lottery content is performed for each of the two start prizes. Can do. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier with respect to more starting information.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the main control means has a second storage state indicating whether or not the second storage means stores start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. A third storage state indicating means indicating whether or not start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored in the instruction means; and the second storage means The second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means when storing the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means The second storage state setting means for setting the storage state of the start information in the state where the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, and the detection with respect to the third storage means hand The storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instructing means when storing the start information acquired and stored in the storage means with the establishment of the start condition detected by Is set to a state in which start information in which determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is incomplete is stored, and the determination unit includes the second storage state instruction unit and the second storage state instruction unit. Based on the state indicated by the three storage state instruction means, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means is the start information that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. In the stored state, based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is incomplete, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, Gaming machine C3, characterized in that is to determine lottery contents by said selecting means to be used in generating output control signals.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the second storage state instructing means indicates whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determining means has not been completed is stored in the second storage means. The third storage state instructing means indicates whether or not the start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored in the third storage means. Further, when storing the start information acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied with respect to the second storage means, the second storage state instruction means indicates the second The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set by the second storage state setting means to a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. In addition, when the start information acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied is stored in the third storage unit, the third storage state indicating unit indicates the third The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set by the third storage state setting means to a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. Based on the state indicated by the second storage state instruction unit and the third storage state instruction unit, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage unit and the third storage unit is determined by the determination unit. Is the state in which the start information that is not completed is stored, the production control signal is output by the first output means by the determination means based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is not completed. Before, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined. Thus, when the start information is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the determination means indicates that the storage state in the second storage means or the third storage means indicates that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed. It is possible to easily determine that certain starting information is stored, and to reliably start determination of the lottery content based on the starting information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete.

  In the gaming machine C3, the storage control means is that the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is the start information that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. Is stored in the second storage means, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means, When the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instructing means is a state in which start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, if the start information storage state in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. The start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means by the control means. In addition, when the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instruction means is a state in which start information for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, The start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the third storage means by the control means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the start information that has not been determined by the determination means already stored in the second storage means or the third storage means from being overwritten by the newly acquired start information. In particular, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously performed by suppressing overwriting by the newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the main control means also stores the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and stored in the storage means in the second storage means. A second standby number storage means for storing the number of standby times until a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the startup information stored in the storage means, and establishment of a start condition detected by the detection means When the starting information acquired along with and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, waiting until the lottery means performs lottery based on the starting information stored in the storage means A third standby number storage means for storing the number of times, and the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means and the third standby number storage means when the lottery is performed by the lottery means. When the standby count subtracting means for subtracting 1 each and information related to the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the starting information stored in the second storage means are output to the sub-control means. , Acquiring the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means, and information related to the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the third storage means A standby number acquisition means for acquiring the number of standby times stored in the third standby number storage means, and the second output means is combined with information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the standby number acquired by the standby number acquisition means is output to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, when the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is established and stored in the storage means is also stored in the second storage means, the start stored in the storage means The number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the information is stored in the second standby number storage means. In addition, when the start information acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is established and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, the lottery is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means. The number of standby times until the lottery is performed by the means is stored in the third standby number storage means. When a lottery is performed by the lottery means, the waiting number stored in the second waiting number storage means and the third waiting number storage means is decremented by one by the waiting number subtraction means. Thereby, since the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the number of waiting times is reduced by 1 accurately, the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. The number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the same start information as the information can always be accurately stored in the second standby number storage means and the third standby number storage means. And when outputting the information regarding the judgment of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the starting information stored in the second storage means to the sub-control means, the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means is In the case where information related to the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information acquired by the standby number acquisition means and stored in the third storage means is output to the sub-control means, the third standby number storage means The stored number of standby times is acquired by the standby number acquisition means. The second output means is configured to output, to the sub-control means, the number of standby times acquired by the standby number acquisition means together with information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Thus, even when the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the sub-control means is informed about the determination of the lottery content. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waiting times until the lottery means the lottery is performed based on the same start information used for the determination of the lottery content among the start information stored in the storage means. it can. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of standby times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine C5, the main control unit includes a standby number determination unit that determines whether the standby number stored in the second standby number storage unit or the third standby number storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit Is performed based on start-up information stored in the second storage means when the standby number determination means determines that the standby count stored in the second standby count storage means is 0 or less. When the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not output to the sub-control unit, and the standby number determination unit determines that the number of standby times stored in the third standby number storage unit is 0 or less, The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in the third storage means is not output to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the standby number determination unit determines whether the standby number stored in the second standby number storage unit or the third standby number storage unit is 0 or less. The fact that the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means or the third standby number storage means is 0 or less is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means among the start information stored in the storage means. This means that the number of standby times until the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start information as the start information is 0 or less, that is, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information. . Therefore, the waiting number determination means determines whether the waiting number stored in the second waiting number storage means or the third waiting number storage means is equal to or less than 0, and among the start information stored in the storage means, Based on the same start information as the start information stored in the storage means or the third storage means, it can be determined that the lottery by the lottery means has been performed. Here, before the information related to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control means based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the start information stored in the storage means If a lottery means performs a lottery based on the same start information as the start information used to determine the lottery content, and the lottery result is output to the sub-control means, then information related to the determination of the lottery content is sent to the sub-control means. Output may not make sense. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, the second output means, when it is determined by the standby number determination means that the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means is 0 or less, the second storage means The information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the start information stored in is not output to the sub-control means, and the waiting number stored in the third waiting number storage means by the waiting number determination means is 0 or less. When it is determined that there is, information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit performed based on the start information stored in the third storage unit is not output to the sub-control unit. Thus, before the information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is output to the sub-control unit, the start information stored in the storage unit is based on the same start information used for the determination of the lottery content. When the lottery is performed by the lottery means, after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means, it can be suppressed that the result related to the determination of the lottery content for the lottery is output to the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control unit stores information indicating a state of whether or not the lottery content has been determined by the determination unit for each start information stored in the storage unit. Determination state storage means for determining, based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, of the starting information stored in the storage means, determination of the lottery content by the determination means. And determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal before the production control signal is output by the first output means based on the start information. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, for each start information stored in the storage means, information indicating whether or not the lottery content has been determined by the determination means is stored in the determination state storage means. Based on the information stored in the determination state storage unit, the determination unit determines start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not performed among the start information stored in the storage unit. Based on the above, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined. Thereby, without providing a storage means different from the storage means for determining the lottery contents, the start information that is not determined for the lottery contents among the start information stored in the storage means can be easily obtained. It is possible to specify and judge the lottery contents. Therefore, an increase in cost due to an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the determination means is based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, and all of the start information stored in the storage means for which the determination of the lottery content has not been performed by the determination means. Judging start information, and determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal before the production control signal is output by the first output means based on each start information. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the information stored in the determination state storage unit, the determination unit determines all of the start information stored in the storage unit for which the determination of the lottery content has not been performed. Based on the start information, before the production control signal is output by the first output unit, the lottery content by the lottery unit used for generating the production control signal is determined. Thus, if a plurality of start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete is stored in the storage means, the determination of the lottery content can be performed for each of the plurality of start winnings. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier with respect to more starting information.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the storage means has a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of standby times until lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the storage areas are associated with the storage areas. Start information for waiting for lottery by the lottery means is stored for the number of times of waiting, and the main control means is based on one start information stored in one storage area of the storage means by the judging means. A gaming machine D3, comprising: a waiting number storage means for storing the number of waiting times associated with the one storage area when the lottery content is determined.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of standby times until the lottery means performs the lottery, and each storage area has the number of standby times corresponding to the storage area. The start information for waiting for the lottery is stored. Here, in the main control unit, when the determination unit determines the lottery contents based on the one start information stored in one storage area of the storage unit, the main control unit is associated with the one storage area. The number of standby times is stored in the standby number storage means. Accordingly, when the lottery content is determined by the determination unit, it is possible to easily determine from the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage unit which storage area is used to determine the start information. it can. Therefore, even when the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage unit, the process related to the determination can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3, the main control means includes a waiting number subtraction means for subtracting 1 from the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means when the lottery means performs a lottery. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the main control means, the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means is decremented by one by the waiting number subtraction means. Here, when a lottery is performed by the lottery means, the storage area in which the start information for determining the lottery content is stored is also changed to a storage area corresponding to one smaller number of waiting times. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means is decremented by 1. Therefore, the lottery is determined by the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means. It is possible to accurately indicate a storage area in which start information used for content determination is stored. Thereby, even when the lottery means performs a lottery in the middle of the determination of the lottery content, the start information used for the determination of the lottery content is stored according to the standby count stored in the standby count storage means. The stored storage area can be easily determined. Therefore, even if it is a case where the lottery content is determined using the start information stored in the storage unit, the process related to the determination can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means outputs the number of standby times stored in the standby number storage means to the sub-control means together with information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. A gaming machine D5 to play.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means outputs the waiting number stored in the waiting number storage means together with the information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determining means. Since it is configured to output to the control means, the lottery means until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information used for the determination together with the information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means The number of waiting times can be notified accurately. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the start information on which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of standby times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform more precise control.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the main control unit includes a standby number determination unit that determines whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage unit is 0 or less, and the second output unit includes the standby unit When the number of times determination means determines that the number of times of waiting stored in the number of times of waiting storage means is 0 or less, information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the standby number determination unit whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage unit is 0 or less. The fact that the number of standbys stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less means that the number of standbys until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the start information used for the determination of the lottery content is 0 or less. That is, it means that the lottery by the lottery means has been performed based on the starting information. Therefore, the lottery means is determined by the lottery means based on the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content by determining whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less. Can be judged. Here, before the information related to the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control unit based on the start information stored in the storage unit, the lottery unit performs a lottery based on the start information, and the lottery result is If it is output to the control means, it may not make sense to subsequently output information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, when the number of waiting times stored in the waiting number storage means is determined to be 0 or less by the waiting number determination means, the second output means Information relating to the determination is not output to the sub-control means. As a result, when the lottery is performed based on the start information used in the determination before the information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is output to the sub-control unit, the lottery result is After being output to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent the result related to the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being output to the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, and D5, the sub-control unit waits for the information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit to be output together with the information. A gaming machine E1 comprising a judgment information storage means for storing in association with the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, D5, the sub-control means has information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. Since it is stored in the determination information storage means in association with the number of standby times output together with the information, the sub-control means uses the main control means to store information relating to the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage means. Various controls can be executed after waiting for the number of standby times in accordance with the lottery. Thereby, in the sub-control means, various controls can be executed based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content and the actual lottery result.

  In the gaming machine E1, the main control means determines the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means and the reliability determination means, and the determination means previously determines the reliability. Notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the reliability of the lottery result is low, and the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means and stores it in the judgment information storage means. A gaming machine E2 comprising a judgment information invalidating means for invalidating all information relating to judgment of the stored lottery contents.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the main control means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low by the reliability determination means, the notification means notifies the sub control means accordingly. The In the sub-control unit, when the notification by the notification unit is received, all the information related to the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage unit is invalidated by the determination information invalidating unit. Thereby, after receiving the notification, the sub-control means can suppress various controls from being performed based on information relating to the determination of the lottery content with low reliability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent various controls based on the erroneous determination of the lottery content, so that more reliable control can be provided by the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the determination information storage means includes a plurality of determination storage areas provided for each number of standby times until a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on start information used for determination of lottery contents. Each determination storage area has an effective information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not information relating to the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination storage area is valid, The information related to the determination of the lottery content output from the two output means is stored in the determination storage area of the determination information storage means corresponding to the number of standby times output together with the information, and further corresponds to the determination storage area A gaming machine E3 comprising a judgment information storage control means for effectively setting information in a valid information storage area.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, the judgment information storage means includes a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of times of waiting until the lottery means performs lottery based on the start information used to judge the lottery contents, and each judgment storage area. In addition, there is provided a valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information relating to the determination of the lottery content stored in the judgment storage area is valid. In the sub-control unit, the determination information storage control unit determines whether the information relating to the determination of the lottery content output from the second output unit corresponds to the number of standby times output together with the information. The information is stored in the storage area, and the information in the effective information storage area corresponding to the determination storage area is set to be valid. Thereby, in the case where the information related to the lottery content is stored in the determination information storage unit, the sub-control unit can easily associate the information related to the determination of the lottery content with the number of standby times of the information. Further, the sub-control means can easily determine whether or not information related to determination of the effective lottery content is stored in the determination storage area provided for each standby count based on the information in the effective information storage area. it can. Therefore, when the sub-control means executes various controls based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to reduce the load related to the processing.

  In the gaming machine E3, the main control means uses the reliability determination means for determining whether the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, and the reliability determination means. A notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the reliability of the lottery result determined in accordance with (2) is low, and the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means and stores the determination information A gaming machine E4, comprising: determination information invalidating means for invalidating information in valid information storage areas corresponding to all the determination storage areas provided in the means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the main control means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low by the reliability determination means, the notification means notifies the sub control means accordingly. The In the sub-control unit, when the notification by the notification unit is received, the information in the effective information storage area corresponding to all the determination storage areas provided in the determination information storage unit is set to invalid by the determination information invalidation unit. Thereby, all the information relating to the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage means is easily invalidated. Thereby, after receiving the notification, the sub-control means can easily suppress various controls from being performed based on the information related to the determination of the lottery content with low reliability. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress various types of control from being frequently performed based on the erroneous determination of the lottery content, and thus it is possible to easily provide highly reliable control by the player.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a variation effect performed by the display means. The means includes a detection means for detecting establishment of the start condition and start information acquired when the start condition is detected by the detection means until a lottery based on the start information is performed. , A lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start-up information that is acquired first and stored in the memory means, and a lottery thereof. A generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, a first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means A determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the lottery content determined by the determination means A second output unit that outputs information to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit controls a variation effect by the display unit based on an effect control signal output from the first output unit. And whether or not to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means. If the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, the suggestion control is performed so that the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects performed by the display means by the control of the variation control means. After the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the means and the suggestion control means, at least the change effect performed first by the control of the variation control means is suggested by the control of the suggestion control means A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising avoidance means for avoiding performance.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition is lottery based on the start information. In the meantime, the predetermined number is stored in the storage means as the upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery means performs lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The production control signal generated by the generation means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Thereby, in the sub-control means, the change effect is performed on the display means by the control of the change control means based on the effect control signal output by the first output means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect. Here, since the variation effect is performed by an effect control signal based on the lottery result, a predetermined game value is given to the player in accordance with the lottery result performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined based on the start information used for the lottery. The information regarding the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. When the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects based on the information regarding the lottery contents output from the second output means, the variation control The suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means over a plurality of variation effects performed by the display means by the control of the means. Therefore, when this suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuating effects, the player can infer the contents of the lottery by this suggestion effect, and can play a game while expecting to be given a predetermined game value. it can. Here, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggestion effect is then performed by the control of the suggestion control means for at least the first effect of change. Is avoided by the avoiding means. Therefore, it can suppress that the expectation with respect to a suggestion falls in a player by performing two or more suggestion effects continuously. Therefore, a highly interesting suggestive effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1, the sub-control unit determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output unit. When it is determined that the second suggesting effect is to be executed by the second determining means to be determined and the second determining means, with respect to one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means, Second avoidance control means for controlling the second suggestion effect to be performed, and the avoidance means performs the suggestion effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects under the control of the suggestion control means, and then This avoids the second suggestion effect being performed not only by the suggestion effect but also by the control of the second suggestion control means for the variable effect that is performed at least initially by the control. Gaming machine F2, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second determination means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, and the second determination means. If the determination means determines that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is controlled by the control of the second suggestion control means with respect to the one change effect performed by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means. Is called. On the other hand, after the suggestion effect has been performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the avoidance means not only provides the suggestion effect but also the It is also avoided that the second suggestion effect is performed by the control of the two suggestion control means. Thus, even if the second suggestion effect is performed with the same content as the suggestion effect for one variation effect, after the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects by the control of the suggestion control unit, Subsequently, execution of the second suggestion effect is avoided. Therefore, it can suppress that the feeling of expectation with respect to a suggestion effect falls by performing the 2nd suggestion effect performed by the same content following an suggestion effect. Therefore, a highly interesting suggestive effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the determination unit determines to execute the suggestion effect, the determination unit includes a determination unit that determines the number of variation effects to perform the suggestion effect. Each time the suggestion effect is performed with respect to the effect, the counter includes a counting unit that counts the number of fluctuating effects causing the suggestion effect, and the avoidance unit is a variation that performs the suggestion effect determined by the determination unit. Based on the number of effects and the number of variable effects that are counted by the counting means and caused to be suggested effects by the control of the suggestion control means, the suggested effects are distributed over the number of variable effects determined by the determining means. Detecting means for detecting that the effect has been performed, and the avoiding means detects that the suggestion effect has been performed by the detecting means, and For at least the first variation effect that by pressure, the gaming machine and wherein the suggested effect the control of the suggested control means is to avoid being performed F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect to be performed is determined by the determination means. In addition, when the suggestion effect is performed over a plurality of variation effects under the control of the suggestion control means, each time the suggestion effect is performed for the variation effect, the number of the variation effects that caused the suggestion effect to be counted Counted by. Here, the determining means is based on the number of variation effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means and the number of variation effects that are counted by the count means and that cause the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means. It is detected by the detecting means that the suggestion effect has been performed over the number of fluctuation effects determined by. Then, when it is detected by the detecting means that the suggestion effect is completed, the suggestion effect may be performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the change effect that is performed at least first by the control of the change control means. Avoided. As a result, it is possible to easily determine that the suggestion effect has been performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the plurality of change effects as many as the number of variation effects causing the suggestion effect determined by the determination means to be performed. After being broken, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect from being performed at least for the first change effect.

  In the gaming machine F3, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, the sub-control means sets 1 to the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means. A variable effect number storage means for storing the added value is provided, and the count means subtracts the value stored in the variable effect number storage means by one each time the suggested effect is performed on the variable effect. , Counting the number of fluctuating effects that caused the suggestion effect, and the detecting means is stored in the fluctuating effect number storage means when the suggestion effect is performed under the control of the suggestion control means. If the value is 1, it is detected that the suggestion effect has been completed over the number of fluctuating effects determined by the determination means, and the avoidance means completes the suggestion effect by the detection means. As long as the value stored in the fluctuation effect number storage means is 1, the suggestion effect is controlled by the suggestion control means with respect to the change effect performed by the control of the fluctuation control means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by avoiding being performed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of the variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means is stored in the variable effect number storage means. Every time the suggestion effect is performed on the variation effect, the value stored in the variation effect number storage unit is subtracted by 1 by the counting unit, thereby counting the number of the variation effects causing the suggestion effect. And when the suggestion effect is performed by control of the suggestion control means, if the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is 1, the suggestion effect is completed over the number of variable effects determined by the determination means. This is detected by the detecting means. After the detection, while the value stored in the variation effect number storage means is 1, the avoidance means avoids the suggestion control means performing the suggestion effect on the variation effect performed by the control of the variation control means. Is done. As a result, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of variation effects causing the suggestion effect to be determined by the determination means is stored in the variation effect number storage means, and each time the suggestion effect is performed on the variation effect, the number of variation effects By simply subtracting the value stored in the storage means one by one, it is possible to easily control detection of completion of the suggestion effect and avoidance of the suggestion effect after the detection. Therefore, after the suggestion effect is completed, when a process that avoids the suggestion effect being performed at least for the first change effect is implemented in the sub-control means, a program for performing the process can be easily constructed. Implementation can suppress the complexity of the entire program.

  In the gaming machine F4, when the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect has been completed by the detection means, and when the variation effect by the display means is performed by the control of the variation control means, the variable effect number storage means The gaming machine F5 is provided with an updating means for setting the value stored in the memory to 0.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the sub-control means detects that the suggestion effect has been completed by the detection means, and the change effect is performed by the display means under the control of the change control means, the value stored in the variable effect number storage means is updated. To zero. Here, when the value stored in the variation effect number storage unit is 1, the avoidance unit avoids the suggestion effect being performed with respect to the variation effect. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided with respect to one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the value stored in the change effect number storage unit is subsequently set to 0, so that the suggestion control unit is again performed. It is possible to make a suggestion effect by controlling the above. Therefore, since the appearance frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, a more interesting suggestion effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the sub-control unit uses the start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed. The determining means includes a specifying means for specifying the number of start information acquired before the start information based on which the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the determining means is specified by the specifying means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the number of fluctuating effects for performing the suggestion effects is determined according to the number of the start information.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination unit, the specifying unit is start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit, and the determination unit executes the suggestion effect. The number of pieces of starting information acquired before the starting information that is the basis of the determination is specified. And according to the number of the start information specified by the specifying means, the number of the change effects to perform the suggestive effect is determined by the determining means. Thus, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage unit, and the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect is obtained. When the lottery is performed and the variation effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be controlled with respect to the variation effect. And with the structure shown to the game machines F3 to F5, the program which performs such control can be constructed | assembled easily, and it can suppress that the whole program is complicated by the implementation.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the sub-control unit acquires a lottery content storage unit that stores the lottery content output from the second output unit, and obtains an effect control signal output from the first output unit. A lottery content extracting means for extracting from the lottery content storage means the lottery content determined based on the starting information from which the lottery result that is the basis for generating the production control signal is derived; and outputting from the first output means And a corresponding judging means for judging whether or not the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extracting means is appropriate. When it is determined that the performance control means and the lottery content are not appropriate, the game machine F7 is controlled so that the suggested performance is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, the sub-control means is provided with lottery content storage means for storing the lottery contents output from the second output means, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the effect control is performed. The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis of signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage unit by the lottery content extraction unit. Then, it is determined by the corresponding determining means whether the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extracting means are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are If it is determined that it is not appropriate, the suggestion control means controls the suggestion effect so as not to be executed. If the production control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the production control signal or the lottery content may be destroyed. Therefore, if the suggested production is performed in such a case, the player will be misunderstood. Although there is a possibility, in this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding of the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub-control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means provides the suggestion effect over a predetermined number of fluctuating effects. The avoidance information writing means for writing the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means, and the avoidance means, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the variation control means The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is prevented from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the change effect that is performed at least first by the control of the above.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the sub-control means is provided with avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect is controlled over a predetermined number of fluctuating effects under the control of the suggestion control means. When done, the avoidance information writing means writes the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means. When the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the avoidance means indicates that the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the change effect that is performed at least first by the control of the change control means. To avoid. In this way, when the suggestion effect is performed over a predetermined number of fluctuating effects, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect from being performed thereafter simply by writing avoidance information in the avoidance information storage unit.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the determination unit determines to execute the suggestion effect, the determination unit includes a determination unit that determines the number of variable effects to perform the suggestion effect, and the avoidance information writing unit includes the determination information A gaming machine G2 in which the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means when the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variation effects determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect to be performed is determined by the determination means. Then, when the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. As a result, after the suggestion effect is performed for the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, it is easy and sure that the suggestion effect is performed after that by simply writing avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means. It can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine G2, the sub-control unit is start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, And means for specifying the number of pieces of start information acquired before the start information on which the determination that the suggestive effect is to be executed is provided, and the determining means includes the number of pieces of start information specified by the specification means. The game machine G3 is characterized in that the number of variable effects for causing the suggestion effects to be determined is determined in accordance with the game machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination unit determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination unit, the specifying unit is start information stored in the storage unit of the main control unit, and the determination unit executes the suggestion effect. The number of pieces of starting information acquired before the starting information that is the basis of the determination is specified. And according to the number of the start information specified by the specifying means, the number of the change effects to perform the suggestive effect is determined by the determining means. Thus, when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be performed, the start information stored in the storage unit, and the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect is obtained. When the lottery is performed and the variation effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be controlled with respect to the variation effect. Then, with the configuration shown in the gaming machine G2, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit after the suggestion effect is performed for the variable effect corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that triggered the suggestion effect. It is possible to easily and reliably avoid the suggestion effect being performed after that.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the sub control means performs a variation effect by the display means under the control of the variation control means. A gaming machine G4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the sub-control unit, when avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit, if the variation display by the display unit is performed under the control of the variation control unit, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage unit is cleared. Is done. Here, the avoiding means is for avoiding the suggestion effect for the variation effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided with respect to one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared thereafter, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means can be performed again. can do. Therefore, since the appearance frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, a more interesting suggestion effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the avoidance information storage unit executes the suggestion effect for the variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage unit. The avoidance information for instructing the avoidance is configured to be memorizable, and the avoidance means is associated with the start information used in the lottery of the variation effect when the variation effect is performed under the control of the variation control unit. If avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the avoidance information is prevented from being performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the variation effect, and the avoidance information writing means When the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determining means, the start to be used in the lottery for the predetermined number of variation effects from the next variation effect to be executed Gaming machine G5 in association with the broadcast, each said avoidance information and writes the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestive effect in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means in response to the changing effect executed by the start information. The avoiding means is configured so that, when the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect. And it is comprised so that a suggestion presentation may be avoided by control of the suggestion control means with respect to the fluctuation production. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effects to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, it is used in a lottery for a predetermined number of variation effects from the next variation effect to be executed. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect from being performed next to the predetermined number of variation effects.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the avoidance information writing unit causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination unit, only the variation effect to be executed next is started in the lottery. A gaming machine G6, wherein the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with information.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, only the variation effect to be executed next is associated with the start information used in the lottery. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, since the suggestion effect is avoided only for the one-time variation effect that is performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be brought into a state where the suggestion control means can be performed again thereafter. Therefore, since the appearance frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, a more interesting suggestion effect can be provided to the player.

  The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode by a variation effect performed by the display means. The means includes a detection means for detecting establishment of the start condition and start information acquired when the start condition is detected by the detection means until a lottery based on the start information is performed. , A lottery means for performing a lottery based on one start-up information that is acquired first and stored in the memory means, and a lottery thereof. A generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, a first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means, and an effect control signal by the first output means A determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal based on the start information used for the lottery, and the lottery content determined by the determination means A second output unit that outputs information to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit controls a variation effect by the display unit based on an effect control signal output from the first output unit. And whether or not to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects based on the information about the lottery content output from the second output means. Determining information to be determined and start information stored in the storage means of the main control means when the determination means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, and the suggestion effect is determined by the determination means. The specifying means for specifying the number of pieces of start information acquired before the start information that is the basis for determining that the execution is performed, and the suggestion effect that is executed based on the determination by the determination means, the variable effect that causes the suggestion effect to be performed If the determination means determines that the number of the start information is less than the number of the start information specified by the specifying means, and the determination means performs the suggestion effect, the number of changes determined by the determination means An amusement machine H1 comprising an suggestion control unit that controls an effect to be performed over an effect.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition is lottery based on the start information. In the meantime, the predetermined number is stored in the storage means as the upper limit. Then, when the variable effect is started by the display means, the lottery means performs lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The production control signal generated by the generation means is output to the sub-control means by the first output means. Thereby, in the sub-control means, the change effect is performed on the display means by the control of the change control means based on the effect control signal output by the first output means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect. Here, since the variation effect is performed by an effect control signal based on the lottery result, a predetermined game value is given to the player in accordance with the lottery result performed based on the start information. On the other hand, in the main control means, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined based on the start information used for the lottery. The information regarding the lottery content is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. When the sub-control means determines that the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content is to be executed over a plurality of variable effects based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, the main control The starting information stored in the storage means of the means, the number of starting information acquired before the starting information based on the determination that the suggesting effect is executed by the determining means is specified by the specifying means, the suggesting effect The determining means determines the number of fluctuating effects to be performed within a range equal to or less than the number of start information specified by the specifying means. And when it determines with performing the suggestion effect by the determination means, it is controlled by the suggestion control means so that the suggestion effect is performed over the number of fluctuation effects determined by the determination means. In other words, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed for all the changing effects corresponding to the start information acquired before the start information that is the basis of the execution of the suggestion effect, but a part of the start effect This is performed for variable effects corresponding to information. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect is not necessarily performed over the fluctuating effects corresponding to all the start information stored in the storage means at that time, so a predetermined game value is given in which start information It is difficult for the player to know whether the possibility of being played is high. Therefore, since the player can continue the game while guessing it, it is possible to provide the player with a highly interesting suggestive effect.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination unit, the determination unit has a number of fluctuation effects of 1 or more and less than or equal to the number of start information specified by the specifying unit. A gaming machine H2 that is selected and determined each time from a range.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, in the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means, the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect is one or more and specified by the specifying means Since it is selected and determined each time by the determining means from a range that is equal to or less than the number of pieces of start information, the number of fluctuating effects at which suggested effects are performed can be changed each time. Therefore, since it becomes more difficult for the player to know which start information is likely to be given the predetermined game value, the player can continue the game by guessing while enjoying it more. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, whether or not the sub-control means executes the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means. If it is determined by the second determination means that determines whether the second suggestion effect is to be executed, with respect to one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means A gaming machine H3, comprising: a second suggestion control unit that controls the second suggestion effect to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the second determination means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means, and the second determination means. If the determination means determines that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is controlled by the control of the second suggestion control means with respect to the one change effect performed by the display means under the control of the fluctuation control means. Is called. Here, it is difficult for the gaming machine H3 to know which start information is likely to be given the predetermined game value when the suggestion effect is performed, and has the same content as the suggestion effect. When the second suggestion effect is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether it is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, the player can continue the game while inferring whether it is the suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting suggestion.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the sub-control unit performs a suggestion effect on the variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage unit. On the basis of the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determining means when it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means. The suggestion instruction information storage means for storing the suggestion instruction information in the suggestion instruction information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effects for causing the suggestion effect, the suggestion control means, In response to the reception of the production control signal output from the first output means, the start information used for the lottery of the variation production executed based on the production control signal. Gaming machine H4 to attach response, wherein the suggested instruction information if it is stored in the suggested instruction information storage means, and controls so as suggested effect is made to the variation effect.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing suggestion instruction information for instructing to perform suggestion effects on the variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means. Is provided in the sub-control means, and when it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means, based on the number of variable effects that cause the suggestion effect determined by the determination means, The suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage unit by the suggestion instruction information storage unit in association with the start information used for the lottery. And the suggestion control means is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variable effects executed based on the effect control signal triggered by the reception of the effect control signal output from the first output means, When the suggestion instruction information is stored in the suggestion instruction information storage unit, the suggestion effect is controlled to be performed with respect to the variation effect. With this, when the suggestion effect is configured to be performed for the variable effect corresponding to a part of the start information of the start information acquired before the start information on which the determination of the execution of the suggestion effect is based Even if it exists, the suggestion effect can be easily performed with respect to the part of the change effect, and the program relating to the control can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the sub-control unit acquires a lottery content storage unit that stores the lottery content output from the second output unit, and obtains an effect control signal output from the first output unit. A lottery content extracting means for extracting from the lottery content storage means the lottery content determined based on the starting information from which the lottery result that is the basis for generating the production control signal is derived; and outputting from the first output means And a corresponding judging means for judging whether or not the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extracting means is appropriate. The gaming machine H5, wherein when it is determined that the effect control means and the lottery content are not appropriate, the suggestion effect is controlled not to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the sub-control means is provided with lottery content storage means for storing the lottery contents output from the second output means, and when the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the effect control is performed. The lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis of signal generation is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage unit by the lottery content extraction unit. Then, it is determined by the corresponding determining means whether the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extracting means are appropriate, and the effect control means and the lottery content are If it is determined that it is not appropriate, the suggestion control means controls the suggestion effect so as not to be executed. If the production control signal and the lottery content are not appropriate, the production control signal or the lottery content may be destroyed. Therefore, if the suggested production is performed in such a case, the player will be misunderstood. Although there is a possibility, in this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is not performed in such a case, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding of the player.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H5, the sub-control unit performs at least the first by the control of the variation control unit after the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination unit by the control of the suggestion control unit. The game machine I1 is provided with an avoiding means for avoiding the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the fluctuating effect performed in the above.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced in any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control unit over the number of variation effects determined by the determination unit, the sub-control unit controls the suggestion control unit at least for the first effect effect to be performed thereafter. The suggestion effect is avoided by the avoiding means. Therefore, it can suppress that the expectation with respect to a suggestion falls in a player by performing two or more suggestion effects continuously. Therefore, a highly interesting suggestive effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub-control means includes avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion control means has the number of fluctuating effects determined by the determination means. If the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the avoidance information writing means writes the avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means. A gaming machine I2 which avoids the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the change effect that is performed at least first by the control of the change control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub-control means is provided with avoidance information storage means capable of storing avoidance information for instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestion effect, and by the control of the suggestion control means, the number of variation effects determined by the determination means If the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means by the avoidance information writing means. When the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the avoidance means indicates that the suggestion effect is performed by the control of the suggestion control means with respect to the change effect that is performed at least first by the control of the change control means. To avoid. Thus, when the suggestion effect is performed over the number of fluctuating effects determined by the determination means, it is easily avoided that the suggestion effect is subsequently performed only by writing avoidance information in the avoidance information storage means. Can do.

  In the gaming machine I2, the avoidance information storage means instructs the avoidance of the execution of the suggestive effect for the variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means. The avoidance information is configured to be storable, and when the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control unit, the avoidance information is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect and the avoidance information is the avoidance information. If it is stored in the information storage means, it is to avoid the suggestion effect being performed by the control of the suggestion control means for the variation effect, and the avoidance information writing means is determined by the determination means If the suggestion effect is performed over the number of variation effects, the predetermined number of variation effects are associated with the start information used in the lottery from the next variation effect to be executed. Gaming machine I3 respectively the avoidance information and writes the avoidance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are produced. That is, the avoidance information storage means can store avoidance information instructing avoidance of execution of the suggestive effect in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means in response to the changing effect executed by the start information. The avoiding means is configured so that, when the variation effect is performed by the control of the variation control means, the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect. And it is comprised so that a suggestion presentation may be avoided by control of the suggestion control means with respect to the fluctuation production. On the other hand, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effects to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, it is used in a lottery for a predetermined number of variation effects from the next variation effect to be executed. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with the start information. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the suggestion effect from being performed next to the predetermined number of variation effects.

  In the gaming machine I2, when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means, the sub control means stores the avoidance information storage if the display means performs a variation effect under the control of the variation control means. A gaming machine I4 comprising means for clearing the avoidance information stored in the means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the sub-control unit, when avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage unit, if the variation display by the display unit is performed under the control of the variation control unit, the avoidance information stored in the avoidance information storage unit is cleared. Is done. Here, the avoiding means is for avoiding the suggestion effect for the variation effect when the avoidance information is stored in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, while the suggestion effect is avoided with respect to one variation effect performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the avoidance information is cleared thereafter, so that the suggestion effect by the control of the suggestion control means can be performed again. can do. Therefore, since the appearance frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, a more interesting suggestion effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I3, when the avoidance information writing unit causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination unit, only the variation effect to be executed next is used for the lottery. A gaming machine I5, wherein the avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means in association with information.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the avoidance information writing means causes the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of variation effects determined by the determination means, only the variation effect to be executed next is associated with the start information used in the lottery. The avoidance information is written in the avoidance information storage means. Therefore, since the suggestion effect is avoided only for the one-time variation effect that is performed after the suggestion effect is performed, the suggestion effect can be brought into a state where the suggestion control means can be performed again thereafter. Therefore, since the appearance frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, a more interesting suggestion effect can be provided to the player.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J1 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H5, and I1 to I5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
203b, 203j Reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203b5 prefetch execution flag (judgment state storage means)
203d first prefetch execution area (second storage means)
203d5 Prefetch hold count storage area (standby count storage means, second wait count storage means)
203e Second prefetch execution area (third storage means)
203e5 prefetch hold count storage area (standby count storage means, third wait count storage means)
203f First look-ahead processing flag (second storage state instruction means)
203g Second prefetch processing flag (third storage state instruction means)
203k prefetch hold count storage area (standby count storage means)
223b Prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means)
223e Continuous notice execution counter (variable effect number storage means)
223g Prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means, lottery content storage means, avoidance information storage means, suggestion instruction information storage means)
C1 first random number counter (part of start information)
C2 first hit type counter (part of start information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of start information)
CS1 Fluctuation type counter (part of start information)
S101 (first output means, second output means)
S201 (detection means)
S207, S211 (second storage control means, storage control means)
S208 (status setting means, second storage status setting means)
S208 (state setting means, third storage state setting means)
S306 to S308 (waiting number subtraction means)
S321 (waiting time subtraction means)
S401 to S413 (lottery means)
S414, S415 (generation means)
S701 Prefetch processing (determination means)
S759 (waiting number acquisition means)
S769 (waiting number acquisition means)
S795 (Waiting time acquisition means)
S1007, S1008 (Aspect changing means)
S1005: No, S1010 (part of suggestion control means)
S1009 (appropriate judgment means, lottery content extraction means, part of suggestion control means)
S1015 Continuous notice determination processing (effect setting means)
S1019 (Judgment information storage control means)
S1020 Continuous notice determination processing (determination means)
S1037 (specifying means)
S1042 (Determination means)
S1051 (determination means)
S1052 (suggestion instruction information storage means)
S1102 to S1109 (variation control means)
S1105 (corresponding judgment means, lottery content extraction means, part of suggestion control means)
S1111-S1113 (second determination means)
S1114 to S1117 (part of suggestion control means)
S1116 (Counting means, updating means)
S1117: No (avoidance means, detection means)
S1118, S1119 (second suggestion control means)
S1131 (avoidance means)
S1132 to S1134 (part of suggestion control means)
S1134 (avoidance information writing means)
S1135 (second suggestion control means)

Claims (5)

The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for controlling based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable control accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. In a gaming machine provided with a predetermined game value when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display manner by a variation effect performed by the display means.
The main control means includes
Detecting means for detecting the establishment of the starting condition;
Storage means for storing the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means until the lottery based on the start information is performed, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when starting the variable effect on the display means;
Generating means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the lottery means;
First output means for outputting an effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub-control means;
Determining means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the start information used for the lottery before the production control signal is output by the first output means;
A second output means for outputting information on the lottery content determined by the determination means to the sub-control means;
The sub-control means is
Fluctuation control means for controlling the fluctuation effect by the display means based on the effect control signal output from the first output means;
Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery content over a plurality of variable effects based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means;
When it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed by the determination means, it is start information stored in the storage means of the main control means, and the determination means that the suggestion effect is executed by the determination means A specific means for identifying the number of starting information acquired before the starting starting information,
In the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination unit, a determination unit that determines the number of variable effects to be performed in the suggestion effect within a range that is equal to or less than the number of the start information specified by the specification unit;
A game machine comprising: suggestion control means for controlling the suggestion effect to be performed over the number of fluctuating effects determined by the determination means when the determination means determines to execute the suggestion effect. The determining means includes
In the suggestion effect executed based on the determination by the determination means, the number of variation effects is selected and determined each time from a range that is one or more and less than or equal to the number of start information specified by the specifying means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The sub-control means is
Second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect performed with the same content as the suggestion effect without being based on the information regarding the lottery content output from the second output means;
If it is determined by the second determination means that the second suggestion effect is to be executed, the second suggestion effect is performed with respect to one variation effect performed by the display means under the control of the variation control means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising second suggestion control means for controlling the game machine. The sub-control means is
A suggestion instruction information storage means capable of storing suggestion instruction information instructing to perform an suggestion effect on a variation effect executed by the start information in association with one or more start information stored in the storage means; ,
Corresponding to the start information used for the lottery of the variation effect for performing the suggestion effect based on the number of the variation effects for performing the suggestion effect determined by the determination unit when the determination unit determines to execute the suggestion effect. In addition, the suggestion instruction information storage means for storing the suggestion instruction information in the suggestion instruction information storage means,
The suggestion control means includes
In response to the reception of the production control signal output from the first output means, the suggestion instruction information is associated with the start information used for the lottery of the variation production executed based on the production control signal. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein, when stored in the suggestion instruction information storage means, control is performed so that an suggestion effect is performed with respect to the variation effect. . The sub-control means is
Lottery content storage means for storing the lottery content output from the second output means;
When the effect control signal output from the first output means is acquired, the lottery content determined based on the start information from which the lottery result that is the basis for generating the effect control signal is derived is extracted from the lottery content storage means. Lottery content extracting means to
A suitable determination means for determining whether or not the effect control signal output from the first output means and the lottery content extracted by the lottery content extraction means are appropriate;
The suggestion control means includes
5. The control according to claim 1, wherein when the corresponding determination unit determines that the production control unit and the lottery content are not appropriate, the suggestion production is controlled to be non-executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

Images